Sree EYL) rol WAT mS Oe 2 ay, ete tah 08 Aleta Bat shee Frey ee Reishee R) eGs he! Oia eRe Bilao atin eet C Neb a, § these ‘ ey Awad athe Bhat Atallah ., . one x 4 e de’ ARAN Nao hea a enh hn € , S Ma BaP Nee Ae, Bit “ aeons Boe Pe is ; cae Pevheddte Hy Ege eBid dia Po hs Nolin td aE OEP Tink he RO, al Aee F oa Lee Pak. tar ota, AR rane ee, Tg 2 ~ = ; - FaAn Se teal ae! Oe r iio ee 4 Rese ra he Pee Nees wy > : DM - i : Ag e SNE 1 Fo : ¥ BO net Phir, othe t “ ne ¥ pata Stee . Lupe ee Padabeapaahaaitenaadee LOG bo Sl Bled Bag oy Gog SE ta ate tating Devt Ee Sets ai tna Asesisston co Pwr aa) Talat hian yb AF tet EONS 4 fue nue ad BAe epee tees oy Bele: gue i Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales Marine Ciolsgical Lahoratery Issued 9th September, 1976 | LIBRARY NOV 29 1976 Woods Hole, Mass. VOLUME 10! 4% PART | No. 445 Registered for posting as a periodical—Category A. The Linnean Society of New South Wales Founded 1874. Incorporated 1884 ‘“‘ For the cultivation and study of the science of Natural History in all its branches ”’ OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1976-77 President Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. Vice-Presidents H. G. Cogger, M.Sc., Ph.D. ; D. W. Edwards, B.Se.Agr. ; P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D. ; T. G. Vallance, B.Se., Ph.D. Honorary Treasurer Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Se., F.L.S. Secretary Ruth J. Inall Council Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. F. W. D. Rowe, B.Se., Ph. D., M.I.Biol., H. G. Cogger, M.Sc., Ph.D. F.LS. D. W. Edwards, B.Sc.Agr. P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D. L. A. 8. Johnson, D.Se. N. G. Stephenson, M.Sc., Ph.D. D. McAlpine, M.Sc., Ph.D. T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. Helene A. Martin, Ph.D. Joyce W. Vickery, M. B-E., D:Se.,, oS: Lynette A. Moffat, B.Sc., Ph.D. J. T. Waterhouse, B.Sce., M. Se. (N. S.W.), P. Myerscough, M.A., D. Phil. M.Se. (R’ding), ELS. J. Pickard, B.Sc.Agr. B. D. Webby, M.Se., Ph.D. A. Ritchie, B.Sec., Ph.D. A.J. T. Wright, B.Sc., Ph.D. Auditors W. Sinclair and Company, Chartered Accountants Linnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology, University of Sydney K. Y. Cho, Ph.D Tnbrarian Constance B. McKay, B.A., A.L.A.A. Executive Editor Janet Donald, B.A., Dip.Lib. The Society’s Headquarters are in Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000, Australia ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 31st MARCH 1976— The one-hundred-and-first Annual General Meeting was held in the Society’s Rooms, Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, on Wednesday, 31st March 1976, at 8.00 p.m.. Mr. D. W. Edwards occupied the Chair. The minutes of the one-hundredth Annual General Meeting (26th March 1975) were read and confirmed. REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR 1975 Publications The Society’s Proceedings were published on the following dates during the year : 1975 Vol. 99, Part 4 23rd. April 1975 1975 Vol. 100, Part 1 1st August 1975 1975 Vol. 100, Part 2 10th November 1975 1976 Vol. 100, Part 3 6th February 1976 The cost of publishing the Proceedings was as follows : $ > Bloeckmaking (Illustrations) 1,300.00 Subscriptions .. 1,734.44 Printing 7... ay .. 4,108.60 Miscellaneous Postage 1,203.29 Salesigy 2: .. 1,380.39 Cost of Reprints : Printing—$1,371.40; Sales—$1,559.48 Membership During the year 26 new members were admitted to the Society, 15 resigned and two died. The numerical strength of the Society as at 1st March 1976 was Ordinary Members 288 ; Life Members 27 ; Corresponding Members 5 ; total 320. Meetings Ordinary monthly meetings were held in March and April at Science House in the Linnean Society Rooms ; in July at the School of Botany, University of New South Wales ; in October at the Edgeworth David Building, University of Sydney. A Special General Meeting was held in the Society’s Rooms in March, in order to confirm acceptance of the new Rules of the Society. Library Requests for photocopies of reference material from Australia, New Zealand and Malaysia have maintained normal standards. The Librarian is in attendance two mornings a week ; the remaining three mornings are spent in cataloguing the collection of the Royal Society of New South Wales. Catalogue cards have been received from the University of Sydney for all serials transferred, and all these titles have been checked for deletion of the holdings by the Society in Scientific Serials in Australian Libraries. Still no catalogue cards have been received for the Society’s monographs which are being held by the University of Sydney as a special collection. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 1 2 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR Several overseas learned societies have advised that they are no longer able to maintain their exchanges, and have indicated that their publications are only available on a subseription basis. After consideration, your Council has decided not to subscribe except in a rare case where the Society has an exceedingly long run and is the only library in Australia holding the serial. Linnean Macleay Lectureship in Microbiology The appointment continues to be held by Dr. K. Y. Cho. Research work in 1975 was reduced considerably, since Professor Tchan took study leave and Dr. Cho was appointed the Acting Head of Department. Preliminary work was carried out on the characterisation of the cell envelope of Pseudomonas capacia isolated from hospitals. The lipid composition of this organism appears to differ from that of other Pseudomonas species. The organism is also found to be resistant to lysozyme, EDTA and a wide range of antibiotics. A paper on the lipid metabolism of Neisseria gonorrhoeae was presented in the International Conference of Chemotherapy in July 1975, in London. Obituaries Dr. W. R. Browne } Council has resolved that obituaries for the late Dr. W. R. Browne and Mr. G. P. Whitley will be Mr. G. P. Whitley } prepared for the Society’s Memorial Series. Miss Gwendoline Allpress (Assistant Secretary 1920-1971). Miss Gwendoline Lucy Allpress, who came as Assistant Secretary to the Society in May 1920, and who retired in May 1971, died in hospital at Newport on 17th February 1976, aged seventy-six years. Miss Allpress was born at Darlinghurst on 12th December 1899, the daughter of Perey and Lilly Allpress (née Walker), and the granddaughter of George Walker, Mayor of the Borough of Paddington in 1902-3 and 1908-9. The Allpress family moved to Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay, opposite the then Linnean Society Hall, around 1913. Miss Allpress attended Sydney Church of England Girls’ Grammar School where she topped the class each year and was college dux in 1916. Later she was to donate her school prizes back to the library at SCEGS. She was a handsome, intelligent and vivacious girl, and in 1919 was engaged to be married, although the marriage did not take place. Miss Allpress began working for the Linnean Society in 1920, and was to be devoted to its interests for the rest of her life. In 1920 the Linnean Society was in its Hall at Elizabeth Bay. Miss Allpress saw two moves of premises, the first to 16 College Street in 1924 and the second to Science House in 1931. Both these moves involved much additional work, especially in library matters. Meanwhile the family had moved to Patterson Street in Double Bay and also bought a holiday home at Newport. Not long after the move Lilly Allpress died, and the care Miss Allpress had given to her sick mother was then given to her father. As time passed he spent more time at their Newport residence, retiring there in the forties, and subsequently dying there. It was at that time that Miss Allpress became more involved with the parish of St. Michael’s, Newport, and from 1950 until her death twenty-six years later she was the Secretary of the Parish Council. The Church and the Linnean Society had become her life and work. For the latter, over the years, Miss Allpress worked with a succession of Secretaries, Honorary Secretaries and Honorary Treasurers. To these she always gave loyal service and assistance, and her aim was unswervingly for the welfare of the Society. Much help was given to Ordinary Members of the Society, too, especially in library matters. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WAtEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR 3 During the last twenty years of service her responsibilities became greater, in view of the fact that the Society had Honorary Secretaries, so that Miss Allpress often dealt with matters requiring immediate attention. Despite substantial wealth, her tastes were simple. She spent little on possessions ; the suggestion from an old friend that she buy a new dress for her Linnean Society Memorial Dinner was met with mild but characteristic disapproval. However, the silver salver given to her on that occasion by the Society was her pride and joy, and stood on her sideboard as one of her most treasured possessions. Miss Gwendoline Lucy Allpress Born with the proverbial silver spoon in her mouth, and inheritress of a small fortune, Miss Allpress chose to live a simple, frugal existence, so that finally a number of deserving charitable institutions would benefit from her wealth. But, wealthy or not, Miss Allpress would have been the same : she needed to give of herself unfailingly, and this she did to the Linnean Society. As Professor J. M. Vincent said, when he was President of the Society, ‘“‘ It is Miss Allpress’s detailed knowledge of Society procedure and organiz- ation that smooths the path of its honorary officers. More than that, however, none of us who has had occasion to seek her help and advice can fail to have been impressed by her graciousness and enthusiasm for the Society’s welfare ”’. Her wholehearted devotion to the Society inspires the admiration of Officers, Council and Members. The Linnean Society of New South Wales salutes Miss Allpress and mourns her passing. Finance The audited accounts presented cover a period of ten months, from 1st March to 31st December 1975, and thus the figures are not strictly comparable with those presented in the previous balance sheets, which covered a period of twelve months. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 1 | REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR As you are aware, the past ten months have witnessed a further burst of inflation, bringing ever-increasing costs of salaries, services and goods, the effects of which your Society cannot escape. In this context it is therefore a source of qualified satisfaction that the balance sheet of the General Account reveals a small deficiency of $341 compared with the deficiencies of $5,253, $7,875, $6,043 and $3,823 revealed in the last balance sheets. It is evident that the measures taken by your Council regarding staffing arrangements, as reported last year, have been beneficial to the finances of the Society. The Society now pays its Secretary only an honorarium for general supervision of its affairs and buys its secretarial services as required from Science House Pty. Ltd., thus obtaining an efficient service but sharing the costs of salaries, statutory holiday pay, provision for long service leave, sick leave, retirement benefits and the like with other organisations which are similarly finding it expedient to avail themselves of this service. In the General Account balance sheet I need only comment on the sum of $3,004 standing against Science House in 1974 and absent from the 1975 figures. That sum was held by the Science House Management Committee, together with similar sums from the other two former owner organisations, for the management of this building. In the interest of efficiency and economy of management, the former owner organisations resolved to terminate the Committee and hand over the management of this building and its lease from the Sydney Cove Redevelop- ment Authority to Science House Pty. Ltd. In consequence $3,004 was repaid to the Linnean Society and, at balance date, was held in its bank account. Since balance date the same sum has been lent to Science House Pty. Ltd. specifically for the purpose of management of this building. In the Income and Expenditure Account attention is directed to the increase in postages, reflecting the savage increase in postal charges which operated for only a part of the year and will doubtless amount to a greater sum in the current year. The costs of illustrations for printing of the Proceedings have again greatly increased. These are net costs after deducting the not inconsiderable donations received from some of the authors towards publication of their papers. These combined costs greatly exceeded our budget. Members have doubtless been disappointed at the small size of the Proceedings recently, and hopefully will appreciate and understand the reasons behind it. With the recent rise and doubtless future rises in wages, it seems inevitable that printing costs will rise still further and that a change to an alternative and cheaper method of printing will have to be adopted, as has been done by many other scientific journals. Plans are being formulated to this end. It is also noted that the combined figures for salaries and secretarial services, amounting to $5,812 this year, demonstrate a saving of $4,212, when compared with $10,024 for salaries last ear. ‘i Turning to income, there has been an increase in membership subscriptions, and in subscriptions to the Proceedings from members and non-members. Science House reimbursements have closed because this Society no longer manages or pays the cost of management of this building. Although for only ten months, the interest received from investments is over $1,000 more than last year, reflecting the turn over at maturity of some of our low interest yielding investments that have been recently available. The fellowships surplus income has increased for the same reason. Science House has provided our share of a small surplus this year, whereas it suffered a small deficit in the preceding year and paid nothing to the Society. The Fellowships Account indicates that, as we did not have a Fellow last year, the whole of the salary that would otherwise have been paid had been added to accumulated funds, and the surplus transferred to the General Account. The fact that the interest received is slightly lower this year is due to the ten month period as compared with former twelve month period. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 1 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR 5 In the Bacteriology Account you will note a loan on mortgage with interest accrued of $1,106. This is due to the death of the mortgagee and consequent delay in receiving interest payments. Our investment and the interest due on it is quite secure but we have been obliged to wait for payment. The Society customarily sends a cheque to the University of Sydney towards the salary of the Linnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology twice a year. During the ten month period only the first of these, for $700, was sent. The second was sent early in 1976 and I am glad to say that our total contribution has been maintained at the same rate as before in spite of the large amount of interest accrued but not yet received into this fund. The Scientific Research Fund, a tax-deductible fund, has received interest of $748 and donations of $2,000. Its accumulated fund now stands at $10,889. The Library Fund, another tax-deductible fund, has received a donation of $87,500 and now stands at $93,366. This fund can be used to provide housing for our library and has been loaned to Science House Pty. Ltd. to provide future accommodation for the library in the new Science Centre. Science House Management Committee Until 1975, Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, was managed by Science House Management Committee, consisting of representatives of the Linnean Society, Royal Society and the Institution of Engineers. On 30th January 1975, Science House Management Committee resolved to take steps to terminate its own existence and the proposal to do so was forwarded as a recommendation to the Councils of the three owner bodies, which duly approved of such action. The Board of Science House Pty. Ltd. agreed to take over the lease for Science House, Gloucester Street, and to manage the building, if and when asked to do so. This administrative change was effected during 1975 and the current lease from the Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority covers the whole of Science House, Gloucester Street, which is owned by the Authority. The settlement of the Science House Management Committee account was reported to the Council of the Linnean Society on 17th December 1975. Science House Pty. Ltd. Annual General Meeting The second Annual General Meeting of Science House Pty. Ltd. was held on 11th September 1975, when the Directors’ Report, Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Account to 30th June 1975 were presented to the shareholders. One of the shareholders, the Linnean Society of New South Wales, was represented by its President, while the other shareholder, the Royal Society of New South Wales, was represented by Mrs. Krysko v. Tryst. The auditor, Mr. W. Sinclair, and the company solicitors, Messrs. Stephen Jaques and Stephen, represented by Mr. D. W. Howard, were present by invitation. The names of the Directors in office at the date of the second Annual General Meeting were : Edrie Keith Chaffer Joyce Winifred Vickery John William Humphries Lynette Anne Moffat Maurice James Puttock Esmond John Selby William Erie Smith Neville George Stephenson Report on Science Centre The principal activities of Science House Pty. Ltd. during 1975 centred around the development of a new Science Centre in Sydney as a permanent home and source of income for the Linnean Society of New South Wales and the. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part | 6 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR Royal Society of New South Wales, as owner bodies, and as a centre providing a wide range of facilities for scientific and professional organisations generally. To this end, Science House Pty. Ltd. settled the contract with F. T. Wimble & Co. Ltd. on 5th November 1974 for the purchase of a substantial building on an attractively central and accessible city site at 35-43 Clarence Street, opposite St. Phillip’s Church. The building itself was suitable for the extensive remodelling needed to provide the facilities for a Science Centre. The final plans of the Architects, Messrs. Jackson, Teece, Chesterman and Willis, were approved on 24th April 1975. Messrs. K. B. Hutcherson Pty. Ltd. were successful in tendering for the constructional work and were appointed as builders on 12th June 1975. Building operations began during the second week of August 1975 and by 20th October 1975 it was reported that demolition work had been completed and that various types of constructional work had been initiated. Since then steady progress has been made and it is anticipated that the new Centre will be ready for occupancy in June 1976. Concessions in Taxation and Rates Science House Pty. Ltd. has been treated by both the Commonwealth and local government authorities in the same way as non-profit making, charitable organisations. The company has been relieved from taxation on its investments and profits ; it has been exempted from land rates and council rates. In general, the position of the company is at least comparable to that pertaining to the Linnean Society of New South Wales and the Royal Society of New South Wales. Staffing For most of 1975 the number of full-time permanent staff employed by Science House Pty. Ltd. was two. A junior typist was added on 7th October 1975. Scientific and professional organisations have continued to make requests for secretarial, editorial and other services, and it is envisaged that further additions to the staff will be made during 1976. One of the bases on which requests for services are met is that salaries for additional staff should be met from income derived from providing these services and that in no way is the company out of pocket through providing these services. Fund-raising Committee Substantial donations of $75,000 and $100,000 from Messrs. F. T. Wimble and of $10,000 from the N.S.W. State Government have already been received towards the cost of the new Science Centre. Science House Pty. Ltd. is most grateful for these donations but they fall short of balancing the increased costs of the project caused by inflation. It is therefore the intention of Science House Pty. Ltd. to launch an appeal for funds at a stage when the new Centre is near completion and when its important role in the community can be more readily explained to prospective donors. During 1975, steps were taken by the company to establish a Fund-raising Committee and Mr. John Studdy, one of our financial advisers, agreed to act as Chairman of this Committee. Science House Pty. Ltd. has authorised the Fund-raising Committee to act on its behalf in seeking and receiving donations towards the new Science Centre. Annual Elections The Secretary announced the election results and declared the following elections for the ensuing year to be duly made : President : Dr. B. Briggs. Members of Council: Dr. P. J. Myerscough, Dr. F. W. Rowe, Dr. P. J. Stanbury, Dr. J. W. Vickery, Mr. J. T. Waterhouse, Professor B. D. Webby. Auditor: W. Sinclair & Co. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Watess, Vou. 101, Part 1 BALANCE SHEETS O8'SEE'80E$ OF TSS°90F 68°88 00L GP SP6 00'T L8°F89 io'o) ve} ~ Non) N & F8'PSO'F ZO0'9S _ 09 OFFS 00°000‘00F 00° OgL "er i 00°00T es 00°000°¢ 00°000°T 0000298 68°88Z SL €1°666 00° P86 eremeg 16046 $ SJOSSV JUILIND [VIOT, yueg 4B sep pury, uo yseg s1oyqoq Arpung "pyy ‘AI_ osnoyR, vousl99—uvoT —Ss]Ossy Jue.) SJUSULJSOAUT [IO J, (qse10jUuy P.ATy4-9u10) 4800 JVW—9snoy]T souUeIDG "pyry souvqdaooy TengnyL pivog osvulVviqd pure Beles 10JVM ‘UV[OMOOPL ‘pyT °0OO sSuUlUyoYy Iesng [eIMolop —s00 yy¥—Sainqyusqeq, 4809 F¥—SULOT Y4[VoMUMOUIULO/) “AIO9 quouidojaAeq, = seommosoy Uvpeysny *- Ajol00g SUIP[INgG JUOURUTIOg *“\A'S'N —syIsodoq. —S]UOUTJSAATT “+ SqoSSW POX [240 py ‘Add esnoy, sotierIag—errvys —4s00 9 V¥—JUSULSoAUT * FO Wo} ToMepomdod ssa7 4so9 JY¥—SOUlIpPe]L 99WO YO 19941IM MO RIDoIdeq ssaT 4sop FV¥—SsUInIT pue soIngxIy ‘omyrmemyp —S]OSsy POXlT ¢99‘80g$ os'ese's0g$ 86L°S0F ZO8*E0T FOO OGL°SI 00L°6 066°F 000°T 00L°9E 8g9°G 99° SPL'T if _ brI6E 20S $8, 66°0F8. SL'BES'L06 186 00°0T EL'SS9' L0G $ $ G-PL6T g99‘80es SuIpUIqyoog ePL'T —SdAIOSOY GLET Loqutodo(l ySTE ‘oouRpeg. BoG'L09 poweg oy 1oj Aoue1yod ssaT ci Uo}dwuapey ornjueqed Wo ord PPY ee “" GL6T YOIe ST soueled —spun,y peyemumooy $ C-FL6L GL61 Tequieseqd ISTE 3 SB JOYS souL[eg LNAOODV TVYANAD SHTVM HLNAOS MAN HO ALAIOOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WAtgEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 SHEETS - ALANCE B: D “TOAMSVOL |, “UO} “AUGMOIA “AL GWOAOL? QL6 1 ATEMAQ of pPoIpuUsULe SV ‘Gh6L PV UOMRIYSISOY, squvjyunooIV ol[qnd 949 Jopun poaroqsisoyy SJUBJUNODDW poloyieyyD “O9 3 UIVIONIS “MW 916, Avensqog JO Kep Quo} VOAes styy AOUPAS 4V CLLVCL “AVOIDOG 9Y} JO syood sayy Aq posopostIp sev puv sn 0} UALS SUOTFRUR[AX9 oY} OF SUIPIODIV “GL GT IOQUIODO(T JSTE 4V Sv STIVYR [eIOURUY 944 JO UOTISsOd aYy YAAOF yos ATJooII00 juno VY aIMyIpusdxG puv suodUT SuIAUVdUODIe puL JooYY soUL[VG sAoqe oy} yey WOLUIdo 9Yy Jo o1v puR GLGT aquioveqq ISTE Pople SYJMOUT Wo} otf} LOJ SOTVAA YINOG MON JO AJoloog URUUYT oy JO Sp1odal pue syood oy} payrpne oArvy oA, LYOdHY STOLIGAV HMNOONT LNAODDV TVHUNAOD 62002 F2S GER FS 62 00L°F2$ 66°0FE os cary oe .. os Aaa Spun T9961 pazyYNuMdIY OF PoltoeysuvIy, IwIA IOJ AOUSTOYOCE Fzg‘e 68°896'S 0S 6SE'F% os ae =" ae oULOOUT [B4OT, 860'TS 00°StTT ees = GL Sr6'L eVzo .: - 5 -- snjding jo areyg — OF TLE‘T —osnoy{ voUla1og 0S'Z6L 66° 08E'T : ae = ae ne ve SVS 19'S OG GIL QF ECCT : - we oe “* soreg sjunideay = 9G¢ PG E86 Gz" 161 poeatoooy SUI 6% 09°80T'L 62°996'F 7% Be i Pex GL6OL 18q FG9'F 66°06 T -U1999(f ISTE Papo poised oy} 1OF ouLOOUT sn{dimg 6G L411 —junod. Vy SdiysMo[oy, 00°0S og'e92°2 ; ms Et He peatedoy ysolojuyT TZL‘9 96 FEL i on JUOUTOSINGUIOY JUOULOSVUL]Y OSNOP{ oou9lg EPZ‘T GP PSL FY PSL 2 8GL°G 0S 008'T ed A —= $9 0GL PRRELO O° : c : SSUIPIDOIg O82‘ PC IGL 00°966 ie E 4 = ee “* S1oqULeyTAL SLF 00°362 —suondriosqneg 00°SéPr $ S $ $ G-PL61 AINJIPUSAXGL [BIO T, a “* guoydejay, SODTAIOG [BITBI9100G quay 9snoH VoUaING gue #9 SOLIvIRG syuLdoy, DOULUSJULeT, PUB SIlvdoyy ve soo, Soo1ajoy AIOUONYVIG Pu SUIQUIG S9S0D SUIQUIIG—ssuIpoov001g. aie so5vqjsog “* JaMog pur yUSsry WNIT g IUBIMssY IVT ae oe AIVIQUT oouRIMsUuy ue SUOIVRIYSNITT sosuedx@m [erdue+) pe moyeDeiday a on SUIUROI) S90 FIPNY WUOCIANLAX ZG8' Fes GG GPE E F200 9c¢ 886 OL FIL CFL t $98 611 OGG STL 66 6GZ 942 GIl 698 GCP $ G-FL6L CL61 Jequied0q ISTE pepus syJUOP Ue], 94} TOF JUNODDY eInjJIpuedx” puv sur1odsuy SHIVM HLAOS MUN HO ALAIOOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sours WaAtes, Vow. 101, Part 1 BALANCE SHEETS SvOLT, ‘UOY] ‘AUGMOTA “AN WOROL 9167 ALMA ONL 9261 AlvnAGayy Jo Aep YyUe}U9Aoes smyy LoupAS 4v CULV PIPUIULE se HOY SJUBJUMNOIDV O[GU_ oy LopuN po.toysisoy SJUVJUNODOV postop reyo ‘OO YY UVIONIS “MA “GOL YOY u *AQOTDOY oY} JO Syood oy} Aq posojosip sv pUB Sh 0} WOAIS SUOTVUR{dxe oY4 04 SuIpxoooK ‘G16, ToqulsoT ISTE 4B SB YUNODOW sdIysMo[pay Avopvy WeoUULT oy} Jo sureye peloueuy yy Jo UorIsod oyy YyIOF 4os ATO9IIO9 juno. VY ony Ipuodx@ PUY gULOOUT SuIAUBCdUIODDR PUL Joo soe VAOGK Oy 4eY} UOTUIdO oly Jo ore PUL CYET LaquIeD0(T ISTE POPU SYJUOUL U9} OY} LOJ STB AA YNOG MON JO AJoIOOg UvoUUTT YY Jo spLodeI puL syoog oY} poIpNe oary 9A, LYOdHY SUTOLIGAV 96'ZE9'L$ FG82$ 96°SE9' L$ FES AE 62°996'F jUNODDW [elouox) OF potieysuesy vad oq} 1oJ snTdimg Feg'F 49°999'G ee ee as “* gunoosoy [eyidey 04 Jejsuviy, gEee'T 96'ZE9'L PeAToodoyY Jsetojyuy FE‘, — aS MOTO AVIV, WRIUUTT JO AIvpeS 7298‘T § $ $ $ GPL6L G-FL6T SLol tequieseq IS[¢E popus SYyUOPY Ud], 9Y} 1OF¥ JUNODDY oInNJIpuodxy| puv suoosuT G0'SFL°6S SLO°LET$ GO'SPL62L$ 8L0°LE1$ 90° SS5'S uve FV YSey) G9e'T —SJOSsV JUOLING 66° GOL LET SPUOULYSOATT [CIO T, SI4°GS1 60° 08F‘S *pyT Ajotog SUIpI MY vipeijsny Jo yuouUvUIIEg — 00°00€‘8 yueg juourdofeasq seomosey uvipesysny 008‘8 —sysodocy GO'SFL‘6S1 GL6T Ioquleoed 4sT¢ ‘oourped. 8L0°26T 00°000‘TT aSV5}IO[Y WO SURO 000°TT Se 00°008°T SITVM YNOS MoN JO YuR| [einyy 008‘ 19°999°% : se ip JUNODI VW 9Ingrp 00°0SZ‘ET “* peytury souvydoooy [engny OGZ‘EL -U0dxXW PUR sWODUT WOAJ IojsuVI, pp 00°002'F€ plvog asvulVid’ PUL osBIOMOS “TOYA WeATOdoLoPT 00L°9& 8E°8L0°LET 06°29‘ T ess peuUrT WOe1odi0) suoyye A PUB “AO NL 69ST 60'GLE SJOSSV JO ON[VA Ul asvaIOUT 00°000‘T SOTVM UINOG MON JO WOISSIUIUMOD AYLOLIQDOT OL 000‘T 98°908'9¢ jyunOd0V SUIODUT WOT SToJSUBLy, 00°00G “PYT eyBaysny Jo Aueduroy umospor9g YsSyNg 006 00°000°04 : ne is ty Avoporvyy — js09 JV¥—SoaInyuoqeq, WRIT 1S Aq poeyyeonbog gunowy 00°006°eS 480/) J¥—SUvOT, YATVOMUOUTULO,) 006°ZS GLOT YI 4ST ‘oouvpeq —SJOSSP POX —spuny, poyejnumoy y $ $ $ $ g G-PrZ6L G-FL61 GL6I JequiedIq ISTE 1B se JOOYS souLleEg LNAODDV SdIHSMOTTEA AVATOVIW NVANNIT SATVM HLOOS MAN HO ALAIDOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy or NEw SoutH WatxgEs, Vou. 101, Part I ETS 7 u BALANCE SHI 10 “LOINSVALL, “WOH, 9167 SIVNALQONT “AUMMOTA “AL GOAOL 9L6T Arrniqey Jo Aep Yyuoojttores g1Yy AoUpAS 4% CULV pepucule sv ‘GEOL JOV WONRYSIdeYT SJULQUMODOYW olqnd oy} Jepun possysisoy sjuRyunoosoy poerezyreyO "OD % WIVIONIS “A “£yaID0G ayy JO syood oy} Aq pasoposip Sv PUY SN 09 UDAIS SUOTyeUR|dxe O44 0} SUIPLOow ‘GJGT Loquisoeq STE 4B sv yuNODDW AsOpOMjoOV_ oy} JO sueye [elouvuy oy} Jo UWOL}ISOd OY YQIOJ YOS ApJO9II00 JUNO oNjIpUIdX| Pue otMoouy SurAueduiooor pure yooyy soured oaoqv oy 4eyy worurdo oly JO a1v PU G1GT Joqueds0q 4STE poeple SUJUOUL 19} 94} LOJ SoTVAA NOY MAN JO AJOIOOG WROUUTT VY} JO sp10d91 PUY SYOOd oY} PojTPNe VACT OAL ELOdat SuOLIdav 18"8z9'as OFS‘ZS TE'829's OSES jee - > ma rs : : T2'8z8'T -. . o. * “7 o. of 189 X aug IO snjding OF Tg oe G . s Sas posaAlsoIy 4soaloquy gree 00'oR sy oa oo 19IM4ooT JO Arepeg—Aoupsg jo AJISIOATU 0046 G-F161 c-FL6L GL6{ Jequiesed ISTE poepus syJUO;L UAT, 94} TOF JUNODDY dINYIpusdxyY pue suUTODUT 12089 6€S GG8LE$ LZ089'6E$ BGS°LE$ GF Slo 1 2s oA Be i yueg ye yseo 266 —syossy juoLINng 6g'900'8E 006°98 a a aa Tt LB 0821'S SS c3’901 6 a = 1E'828'T = ie te Ivo Loy snjding ppy GS6 cS'90L'T penooy 4solejyUT PPP 96° 196 x SS GL6OL YOIeW 4ST ‘oourleg 00;000'8 ** we so ee osesq1Of UO UBOT, 000'8 aAIosoy ASOLOIQOIYL UL LemMgosT Avopvy 00°008'T os: ue Be “4480p FV¥—pleog 008'T 00°006'9€ 006°9§ OSVUIBICT PUB IBBIIMAY “1O}V MA ULPLOCOMET SSS 00°00@ "ah oe 24 i su “PyT 00Z OO;006' ZL °° ‘990L FUNODDW sULODUT WOly SloJSUBIT, eyeiysny jo Aueduioy wmMepo1jed Ysa 00°;000'FS ** =e a Se “+ ABOPVI —sommyueqo(y WRYIM Ug Aq peyyronbsgq yunouy 4soy JY—suvoT YA[VoMUOTIUIO,) 006°9% —G) GT doquiessg 4STE ‘eourled —S]WOUTSIAUT —spuny poyrnumMooy $ $ $ $ $ $ SPL6T C-FL61 CL6l Lequisseq ISTE 3 SB JooOYS souvjeg LNAODDV ADO TOINALOVEA SATVM HLOOS MAN AO ALAIOOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 1 11 BALANCE SHEETS ISBOLT, ‘UOFT ‘KUMMOIA “A\ HOAOL! 00°688'0T$ $9'6% 96°6S80L 9S'SELS 00°002'L 00°004'T 00°TZ0'T 00°00F LT 00°002°% 00°00@'T $ OL6T ALENAIGI 9/6 Aveniqay Jo Aep YU9eqUIAS sIyy AOUPAS 4% CALVA “popuoure se ‘CFE POV UOMeAASID0Y SJURJUNODDV oGn_ 944 JopuN poleqsisey sjuRjUNODDW peloq1eyy) "00 2 UIVIONIS “M £40100 9} JO Syood 94} Aq pesoposrp SB PUY SN 0} WAAIS SUOIVLULIAxXe 9YY 0} SuIps09de “G1 GT IOQUII.ECT ISTE Ye SB JUNODDW pun YOIvesoy oYYUSIOG oy Jo sureye [RIOURUY 9} JO WOIISOd 9y} YYIOJ sjos ApyoorIOo yooyY oouvjeg saoqe syy vy} Wolutdo 9yy Jo ore pUL GLGT IoquId.0qy ISTE popue SYZUOUE 19} 9 OF saTeAK UYNOG MeN JO AYOIOOY WrouULT oY} JO splooVl PUB SYOod 9Yyy pozIpNe oavy oA, LYLOdHY SHOLIGAV TFL'8$ 00°688‘0T$ IPL‘ yued 9e YsRy) OZL —SJOSSYP JULI) 1Z0‘8 9E°8EL ponboy 4so1ojUuy ppv 00°000°S Re asvdLIOW UO SUvOT 000° ae ** paqmry sourydoo0y [engny 002 T peylury uoyeiodiog souRydeo0y [eIysnpuy 00z‘T PoPTUIT WOje1od10H suogfeA PUR “q'O NA 1Z0'L 00°688'0L Tee = “* G1GT coquiaoa(y ISTE “oouKleg IfL'8 peyuary + eyBVysny jo uoNeiodiog suUeULy — cS poytury souvydao0 VY [VIoUey PUL [VIOIOUIULO:D OOF T 00'000°S °° ae oe pe poAtooayy ~SUOIYBUOT “pyT vyeysny jo Auedutoy wnaspo1jeg Ysylig OOzT ° LO SPL Cee re et ae “+ poadAledey 4So10JUT —4s0/) J ¥—So.tnguoqod, eL07L8 -- Es Be “* G16T YOIRPL 4ST “oouvpeg —SJUIUYSIAUT —Sspuny poyenuMooy $ $ $ $ $ G-PL6L G-FL61 GL6[, J9equIE.eg ISTE }e SB JOOYS vouVleg ENAODOV GNNA HOUVASAA OIMILNAIOS SHTVM HLNOS MAN HO ALAIOOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SoutH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 1 TS ‘ uu ) SHEE BALANCE » “AMGMOTA “MA HORKOL 926, Ateniqay Jo Avp yyusequoags siyy AOUPAS 4v GCALVA poepuswule sv ‘EF6L (OV UONRIYSISOY SJUBJUNODDY oqng sy} JepuN peloysisoyy syuRjuNoODDV po1ey1eyO ‘OD % UIVIONIS “M *Aj9II0G ayy JO syood ayy Aq POSOPOSIP SV PUB SN OF WAAIS SUOTIYVUL[AXe OY} 0} SUIPLOID’ “GL GT JoquIadeq JSTE YB Sv YUNODDW puNng AIvIqVT yy JO sireye Jeburuy sqyy JO WOTpIsod oy YAIOJ sjos ApJOoIIOD Yooys souRpeg oaoqe oly 4evyy uOoTUIdO oY4 JO oe1v puR GLE LoquIed0(T, 4STE papa SYJUOUL 94 OY LOF SofeA\ YQNOG MON JO AQOIDOG UBOUUTT 94} JO SpLodoaI PUK SYOOd 944 PaxIpNe GART OA, LYIOdHad SUOLIGAV 00°998*€6$ 998°¢¢ 00°99E°E6$ 998°G¢ 00°998°E6 pea a ‘+ G16T doquiadeq ISTE ‘aouR[eg, 998°C 00°;998E6 °° as 52 a “" “pyT “AG osnox, soueIDg 998° 00°00G°48 pesalsdoy SWOTeUoT —FUNODDV Weo'T 00°998°¢ * GLOL Wore IST “oouerped —Ssyossy juermy —spuny poyemumooy $ $ $ $ $ G-PZ6L G-PL6L GL61 Joquieseg ISTE }e SB JOOS soUV[eg LNNOODV GNNY AYVUAIT S€HTVM HLONOS MUN AO ALHIOOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socorntry oF NEw SoutH WatgEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 EARLY DEVONIAN IGNEOUS ACTIVITY AND SOME STRATIGRAPHIC CORRELATIONS IN THE TUMUT REGION, NEW SOUTH WALES J. P. BARKAS* [Accepted for publication 17th December 1975] Synopsis North of Talbingo, the Tumut River in southern New South Wales traverses a belt of folded Silurian metasediments and volcanic rocks, the latter being part of an extensive association here named the Wiradjuri Volcanics. Several bodies of sub-volcanic leucogranite (the Gocup and Bogong Granites, and the Killimicat and Lobs Hole Adamellites) postdate the rocks of this belt and exhibit clear petrographic and chemical affinities. Ignimbritic rhyolites of the Buddong and Minjary Volcanics and the Gatelee Ignimbrite are stratigraphically equivalent, spatially associated with these leucogranites, and also comprise a petrologically coherent group. New radiometric and palaeontological evidence indicates that both groups are of Harly Devonian age and enables regional stratigraphy to be refined. The ignimbritic rhyolites may represent the extrusive equivalents of the leucogranites but other volcanic and plutonic rocks of post-Silurian age in the area are clearly unrelated to this magmatic episode. INTRODUCTION The town of Tumut, 70 km due west of Canberra, is situated within a belt of folded rocks that comprises the southern part of what has been recently termed the Bogan Gate Synclinorial Zone (Scheibner, 1974). These rocks were deposited in the southwestern portion of the Cowra Trough (Packham, 1969, p. 6). A broad two-fold division is characteristic of much of this belt : a unit dominated by porphyritic rhyodacites and pyroclastic rocks of rhyolitic to dacitic composition, with intercalated sedimentary material of varying prominence, overlies more strongly deformed rocks of diverse lithology which include shales, siltstones, phyllites, basic schists, serpentinites and minor marbles. Several granitic bodies intrude the rocks of this belt, and it is unconformably overlain in places by more gently folded supracrustal rocks of Early to Late Devonian age. In the Tumut region, this belt appears between the Burrinjuck- Young Batholith in the east, and the Wagga Metamorphic Belt and Wondalga Granite to the west. The upper unit in this area has been named the Blowering Beds (Ashley et al., 1971, after Adamson, 1960a). Less is known of the more complex lower unit—it includes at least the Bullawyarra Schist and Bumbolee Creek Beds, and possibly the Honeysuckle Beds and Coolac Serpentinite. All these have been discussed by Ashley e¢ al. (1971), who have also described the Bogong Granite and Killimicat Adamellite, which intrude the folded succession east of Tumut, and the Gatelee Ignimbrite, which overlies it unconformably. Northwest of Tumut, however, previous geological investigations have been limited to broad reconnaissance studies such as that of Adamson (1960a). A granitic stock in this region is here named the Gocup Granite, the name being taken from the village of Gocup situated 1 km from its eastern boundary. This paper describes the Gocup Granite and associated rocks, as well as occurrences of similar lithologies over a much wider area (see Fig. 1). New palaeontological, radiometric and petrological investigations have enabled part of the sequence of sedimentation, granitic intrusion and volcanic activity in the area to be dated accurately and allow a refinement of regional stratigraphy. * Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney, New South Wales, 2006. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety or New SoutrH WateEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 14 STRATIGRAPHIO RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. NEW SOUTH WALES Cootamundra SYDNEY e. Canberra LSAN . Fes METAMORPHIC NN eS eS x) Wondalga” “*, Batholith MUNK Be Kae ee Ome REFERENCE Blacks Flat Diorite Cumberland Rhyol ite Talbingo Basalt Sb) sh + + + gb + BORAIG Landers Ck Fm Saddle Tuff Buddong Volcanics af + + + + + + + + + + + + 4+ + + + Gatelee Ignimbrite Minjary Volcanics Lobs Hole Adamellite Killimicat Adamellite Bogong Granite Gocup Granite Rhyodacitic volcanics and associated sediments WIRADJURI VOLCANICS JIndifferentiated ilurian strata Fig. 1. Geological sketch map of the Tumut District. (Modified from Adamson and Loudon, 1966, and Ashley et al., 1971). For stratigraphic relationships see Fig. 2. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or New SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 1 J. P. BARKAS 15 GEOLOGY NORTHWEST OF TUMUT METASEDIMENTS An extensive succession of folded low-grade metamorphic rocks of unknown thickness is intruded by the Gocup Granite. In and north of Tumut, this succession is overlain by porphyritic rhyodacites and tuffs of the Blowering Beds. The metasediments consist mainly of phyllite, lithic sandstone and thinly-bedded quartz-siltstone, with subordinate conglomerate, marble, volcanic breccia and tuff. These rocks have undergone regional metamorphism only to lower ereenschist facies ; chlorite is extensively developed. A closely-spaced subvertical cleavage striking from 5° to 20° west of true north is widespread, and sedimentary structures are rarely observed. Deformation is most intense in the narrow septum of metasediments separating the Wondalga and Gocup Granites, where bedding is generally obliterated by two sets of overprinted cleavage, the second parallel to the axial planes of tight, locally isoclinal, mesoscopic folds in the earlier-generation cleavage. The fine-grained phyllites from this belt contain 40-60°% rounded quartz grains (average diameter 0-02 mm) in a sheared matrix of finer-grained quartz, muscovite, chlorite and limonite. Relict, fractured plagioclase grains of composition around An,, characterise the tuffaceous material, which may have been andesitic, but is now extensively chloritised. In addition, local occurrences of actinolite schists, which become more prominent northwest of the Gocup Granite, attest to the presence of more basic rocks in the original sequence. East of the Gocup Granite, the sediments are less deformed, though the penetrative cleavage is still characteristic. Quartz-rich siltstone with limonitic cement is the dominant rock type, with some coarser-grained lithic sandstone and greywacke. These rocks are very similar to the Bumbolee Creek Beds of Ashley et al. (1971), a sequence of slaty shales, siliceous siltstones and lithic sandstones exposed extensively east of the Tumut River. Both units are overlain by the Blowering Beds and stratigraphic equivalence is suggested. Marble and Serpebtinite Small pods of marble occur en echelon, trending about 20° west of north, within the belt of metasediments separating the Group and Wondalga Granites. This marble is foliated, and consists almost entirely of white, fine-grained, recrystallised calcite, with occasional cherty nodules and tale bands. Parasitic and kink folds mirror the deformation in the surrounding phyllites and siltstones. Isolated exposures of similar marble occur along strike both to the north and south. The horizon extends north-northwest to at least a point east of Mount Horeb where the rock was quarried last century (Carne and Jones, 1919, p. 350), while to the south it is exposed discontinuously over a distance of some 15 km parallel to, and east of Gilmore Creek. Serpentinite is found in this narrow belt of country rocks at isolated localities along much the same zone as the marble described above, though the two rock types have not been observed in contact. The serpentinite is composed of reticulate masses of fine-grained serpentine minerals, with larger grains of altered pyroxene (bastite) and pale sea-green antigorite. Anthophyllite, picotite, magnetite and chlorite are present in smaller amounts. A relic igneous texture is apparent, and these rocks are considered to have had an original composition of peridotite or harzburgite. Quartz-magnetite-hematite rocks are associated with the serpentinites. Age — In spite of the pronounced deformation and recrystallisation in the marble pods west of the Gocup Granite, recognisable conodont fragments were found to have survived the metamorphism. These represent the only fossils recorded PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoOcIETY OF NEw SoutH WaAtgEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 16 STRATIGRAPHIC RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. from strata below the Blowering Beds in the Tumut district. The fragments are of a form with an asymmetric platform ledge and a small basal cavity. They show aflinities (T. B. H. Jenkins, pers. comm.) to the genus Polygnathoides Branson and Mehl, a platform-type conodont of Ludlovian age (Walliser, 1964). Link and Druce (1972) have recorded Polygnathoides siluricus and P. emarginatus from the middle Ludlovian Silverdale Formation of the Yass Basin. The fauna recorded from the Blowering Beds northeast of Tumut (Ashley et al., 1971) ineludes corals, brachiopods and graptolites generally indicative of a Silurian age, as well as the conodonts Tvrichonodella inconstans Walliser and Ovarkodina ef. jaegeri Walliser. Although this fauna may be reworked in part, it confirms a Middle to Late Silurian age, suggested on limited evidence by Adamson (1960a), for the whole country rock succession northwest of Tumut, thus placing an older limit on the time of intrusion of the Gocup Granite. Gocue GRANITE This body is discontinuously exposed over an elliptical area of some 42 km? consisting mainly of a range of hills, in part flat-topped, that rises steeply from the east and west, but more gently from the south, to an elevation of about 400 m above the surrounding country. In the northwest, on and near Minjary Mountain, the granite is overlain by rhyolitic lavas and ignimbrites of the Minjary Volcanics. Outerop is generally good on the steep flanks of the hills but is often poor on the upper, flat to undulating central plateau which supports natural forest vegetation, Except near its margins, the granite is massive and unstressed : joint orient- ations show no regular pattern and neither mineralogical nor tectonic foliation is present. The body is largely homogeneous and composed of leucogranite with an average grainsize ranging from 2 to 7 mm. The grainsize tends to decrease at topographically higher levels, possibly indicating that the Gocup Granite has not been eroded far below its original roof. Microscopic examination reveals that quartz and alkali feldspar (perthitic microcline and primary albite) together generally comprise at least 80% by volume of the rock, the remainder being chiefly biotite, muscovite, oligoclase (as relict phenocrysts) and tourmaline, in varying proportions. Muscovite-free varieties are rare. Zircon, apatite, sphene and fluorite are present as accessories, but always collectively total less than 0:5°% of the mode. Secondary alteration of the feldspars and biotite is widespread, with the appearance of sericite, epidote, clays, chlorite and hematite. Micrographic and myrmekitic quartz-feldspar intergrowths are common, especially in the finer-grained variants. Minor rock types within the stock probably occupy less than 5% of the total outcrop area and comprise, in the main, fine-grained aplite patches and coarse quartz-rich tourmaline-bearing pegmatite veins. The former have much the same mineralogy as the host granite and are distinguished only by a mean srainsize as fine as 0-5 mm. Quartz, pink feldspar and tourmaline are the main minerals in the pegmatites, the tourmaline occurring in radiating clusters and bladed aggregates up to 20 em in length. Contact effects about the Gocup Granite are limited to a narrow zone, in places less than 10 m wide, in which the country rocks are indurated and brecciated. Development of a prominent metamorphic aureole, like those adjacent to the Killimicat Adamellite and parts of the Bogong Granite, is not apparent. This may be due in part to the siliceous nature of the metasediments which would preclude the development of mineral assemblages indicative of thermal metamorphism, but structural features at the margin of the Gocup Granite indicate forceful emplacement of a massive, semi-solid body to its present crustal position by upward and lateral wedging apart of country rocks that were already strongly cleaved. In the southwest, the contact with the metasediments dips away from the granite at over 80°. In places along the eastern contact, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socitery or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 1 J. P. BARKAS ire the granite is somewhat porphyritic and satellitic bodies of granite and porphyritic microgranite intrude the country rocks to the east, north and northwest of the main pluton ; these bodies are too small to be shown on Fig. 1, having outcrop areas of only a few thousand square metres. Chemical data for the Gocup Granite are presented in Table 1 ; radiometric ages for four samples have been determined by Dr. J. R. Richards (Research School of Earth Sciences, Australian National University). K-—Ar data on biotites and muscovites yield a mean age of 410+4 m.y. and a Rb-Sr age of 408 m.y. has also been determined. The significance of these data will be discussed later. MINJARY VOLCANICS A succession of porphyritic and banded rhyolites unconformably overlies both the Silurian country rocks and the northwestern margin of the Gocup Granite, in the vicinity of Minjary Mountain. The name Minjary Volcanics is proposed for this sequence which has a maximum thickness in excess of 350 m, and may be broadly divided into two units : (1) a lower series of massive, porphyritic lava flows and ignimbrites ; (2) an upper unit of fine-grained, banded rhyolite. The porphyritic rocks of the lower part of the Minjary Voleanics are rhyolitic to rhyodacitic in composition, and purple to brown in colour. In some specimens the presence of fragmental and welded textures suggests an ignimbritic character. The rocks consist of phenocrysts of quartz, oligoclase and, to a lesser extent, Sanidine, in a fine-grained groundmass, chiefly of quartz and alkali feldspar. Biotite, commonly replaced by chlorite, forms occasional glomeroporphyritic aggregates. Sphene, pyrite, zircon, apatite and monazite are present as accessories, while epidote, muscovite, calcite, zeolites and prehnite occur as secondary phases. Spherulitic and devitrified glassy textures are often present, but flow banding is rarely prominent. Conglomeratic bands with a maximum individual thickness of about 5 m occur at various stratigraphic levels in a zone about 60 m thick near the top of the lower, porphyritic section of the Minjary Voleanics. The detritus in these poorly-sorted rocks consists of angular pebbles up to 8 cm in diameter of coarse- grained leucogranite and rounded to subangular fragments of quartz-rich rhyolite and, rarely, schist and phyllite. The matrix contains angular pink feldspar grains and quartz fragments ina purple silt that is similar in colour to much of the underlying porphyritic rhyolite. Broken tourmaline needles extracted from the matrix of this conglomerate possess optical properties identical with those of the deep indigo tourmaline of the Gocup Granite. Associated grits and arkoses contain angular to rounded grains of quartz and pink feldspar with lithic fragments, again set in a fine-grained, purple matrix. The lithology of these rocks suggests strongly that they were derived in part from the underlying Gocup Granite or a very similar body, and from the local volcanic rocks. Southwest of Minjary Mountain, non-porphyritic, massive to banded rhyolite overlies the porphyritic volcanics and intercalated sediments. The banding, highly contorted in places, is textural rather than mineralogical and widths of individual bands range from less than 0-02 mm to more than 15 mm. Massive, non-banded rhyolites within this upper unit have a mineralogy similar to that of the banded rocks, being essentially composed of very fine-grained quartz and alkali feldspar. Much of this upper section of the Minjary Voleanics appears to represent fine ash-fall and flow material. Palaeontology Thinly-bedded, sparsely fossiliferous siltstones form discontinuous bands immediately above the base of the banded rhyolites, southwest of Minjary Mountain. Individual lenses have a maximum thickness of 1-5 m and are PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101. Part 1 ls STRATIGRAPHIC RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. composed of fine lithic silt, quartz and broken shelly material. The presence of ‘* Siluro-Devonian Brachiopoda ... from the Minjary Ranges near Tumut ” was first reported by Stephens (1882). Subsequently, fossils collected from the area by Mr. G. Hayes in 1900 were identified by Dun (1901) and again by Fletcher (1961). The locality was originally listed as “‘ Portion 41, Parish Calafat, County Buccleugh ” (Dun, 1901). Almost certainly, however, the true location was Portion 241, where the fossiliferous horizons of the Minjary Voleanics examined in this study are exposed. The fauna collected by the present author in 1971 is similar but more diverse than that listed by Dun or Fletcher, and comprises the following forms : Brachiopoda : Articulata— Howelletla? jaqueti (Dun) Meristina sp. Molongia? sp. Strophonella manta Talent Strophodonta? sp. Nadiastrophia? sp. Hipparionyx? sp. chonetid indet. Tsorthis alpha (Gill) Schizophoria conveca Dun ? dalmanellid indet. Coelenterata : Tabulata— cladoporid indet. The tentative determinations are due to the fragmentary nature of the specimens and their generally poor state of preservation ; the silty matrix obscures much of the fine detail such as micro-ornament. The assemblage has a definite Early Devonian aspect ; similar faunas charac- terised by Howellella? jaqueti have been recorded from several places in Cobar Basin and Parkes Platform deposits (cf. Packham, 1969, pp. 147-149 ; Strusz et al., 1972, pp. 442-443 and chart). A lower to middle Siegenian age is consistent with all these occurrences ; the assemblage appears unlikely to be as old as Gedinnian or as young aS Emsian. A mid-Early Devonian age is indicated for the Minjary Volcanics. REGIONAL CORRELATIONS Pre-Devonian Strata The belt of folded rocks of which the metasediments at Tumut are a part, extends north-northwest at least as far as Stockinbingal and Barmedman where it is overlain by extensive Quaternary deposits. South of Tumut, it narrows to less than 10 km in width, between the Bogong and Wondalga Granites. Stratigraphic relations within the complex lower unit are unclear as only parts of it have been examined in detail. To the north, rocks similar to the Bullawyarra Schist have been named the Jindalee Beds by Basden (1974) who considers these units to represent strongly deformed oceanic crust. Tectonic syntheses by Scheibner (1973, 1974) propose that parts of these are as old as Cambrian and that the serpentinites associated with the Jindalee Beds, as well as the Coolac Serpentinite, represent the lower oceanic crust and upper mantle that formed the basement of the Cowra Trough. The age relationships on which this interpretation depends, however, must remain in doubt as the metasediments are all unfossiliferous. In this regard, the presence of conodont fragments in the marbles west of the Gocup Granite may be crucial, as these marbles are associated with serpentinites, quartz-magnetite rocks and basic schists similar to those of the Jindalee Beds, and the styles of deformation are comparable. Thus the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wats, Vot. 100, Part 1 J. P. BARKAS 19 inferred Silurian age for the metasediments northwest of Tumut could have important wider tectonic implications if regional correlations can be established. Marble occurs elsewhere in the low-grade, foliated metasediments, at localities near Gilmore, west of Brungle, and east of Gilmore Creek some 20 km south of Tumut, where it is again associated with serpentinite and quartz-iron oxide rocks (Bradley, 1968). Near the Murrumbidgee River south of Nangus, Vallance (1953) has described serpentine rock, marble and jasper-iron oxide rocks that occur in close proximity within a zone of low-grade, folded metasediments. Regional correlations with the Blowering Beds are less tenuous. The ‘* Blowering Porphyry ” was originally described from between Tumut and Talbingo (Hall and Relph, 1956 ; Adamson, 1960a) where it is intruded by the Bogong Granite. Ashley et al. (1971) and Basden (1974) have extended the mapped area of this unit north and northeast of Tumut to beyond Cootamundra. Sedimentary material associated with the dominantly rhyodacitic extrusive rocks and pyroclastics has varying prominence over the areas examined and includes volcanic and calcareous sandstones, siltstone, mudstone, chert and conglomerate. The only known fossils are those recorded by Ashley et al. (1971) which indicate a Middle to Late Silurian age. Similar rhyolitic to dacitic volcanics, with associated sediments and more basic voleanics, are common in the southern part of the Cowra Trough where they occur over extensive areas around the Burrinjuck- Young Batholith. These units include the Goobarragandra Beds (Ashley et al., 1971), Douro Volcanics (Brown, 1941) as now expanded, Canowindra Porphyry (Stevens, 1952; Ryall, 1965) and Frampton Voleanics (Basden, 1974), all of which have been assigned a Middle or Late Silurian age, and at least parts of the Illunie Rhyolite (Adamson, 1960b), Wyora Porphyry (Strusz, 1971) and Peppercorn Beds (Strusz, 1971). This last unit is in need of subdivision : it includes limestones that are as old as Llandoverian (Nicoll and Rexroad, 1974) as well as the rhyolites and dacites that are of interest here. It has been suggested (Ashley and Basden, 1973 ; Basden, 1974) that some of the volcanic units are closely related to the batholith they surround. Detailed chemical and mineralogical studies of these ‘‘ porphyries ”’ and the various rocks of the Burrinjuck-Young Batholith (Barkas, in prep.) point to a genetic association. It is proposed to refer to these related volcanic rocks that surround and are in part intruded by this batholith as the Wiradjuri Voleanies. This is a collective term and does not supersede the existing formation names of its constituent units. The name is taken from that of an Aboriginal tribe that inhabited a wide area centred around the Lachlan and Murrumbidgee Rivers (Tindale, 1940). Early Devonian Correlations Acid voleanism of Early Devonian age was not uncommon in the southern part of the Cowra Trough, where its products, like the Minjary Volcanies, rest unconformably on older strata. About 15 km northeast of the Gocup Granite, 100 m of rhyolitic ignimbrite (the Gatelee Ignimbrite) overlies the Blowering Beds and older rocks (Ashley ef al., 1971). Though banding is there more prominent, much of this unit exhibits a striking resemblance to the purple and brown rhyolites of the Minjary Volcanics. Forty kilometres south-southeast of Tumut, the rhyolitic Buddong Voleanies, the lowest unit of the Lower to ?Middle Devonian Boraig Group, lies unconformably above the Silurian Ravine Beds (Moye et al., 1969). The Buddong Volcanics are themselves overlain east of Ravine by beds of the Byron Range Group, the middle part of which (the Lick Hole Limestone) contains a fauna similar to that of part of the Murrumbidgee Group in the Taemas-Cavan area (Moye et al., 1969, p. 145). As this fauna is now considered to be Emsian in age (Chatterton, 1973) a close time-correlation must exist between the Minjary and PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New South WALES, Vou. 101, Part 7 20 STRATIGRAPHIC RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. Buddong Voleanies. Well-exposed sections of this latter unit in the east of the Boraig Basin and near Lobs Hole reveal a sequence strikingly analogous to the Minjary Voleanies : about 100 m of massive and banded, purple, porphyritic ignimbrites are overlain by conglomerates and grits, followed by more rhyolite. The sediments contain fragments of leucogranite, rhyolite and chert. It is envisaged that the lower part of the Minjary Voleanics, the Gatelee Ignimbrite and at least part of the Buddong Voleanics are stratigraphically as well as lithologically similar, and form an Early Devonian “ rhyolite association ’? whose significance will be discussed later. A similar analogy is apparent to the north. Basden (1974) notes that ‘ rhyolitic lavas with an interbedded conglomeratic member occur to the west of Cootamundra, unconformably overlying the Frampton Voleanics’’. She refers to this unit as the Cootamundra Voleanics and includes shale which conformably overlies the rhyolite and contains the Howellella? jaqueti fossil assemblage (Sherwin, unpubl., quoted by Basden, 1974) in her definition of this unit. East of the Indi River near the Victorian border, 175 km south of Tumut, strongly folded, low-grade metasediments and acid to intermediate volcanics of the late Middle to early Upper Silurian Cowombat Group are overlain by rhyolites and rhyodacites of the Snowy River Voleanics with a marked angular unconformity (Moye et al., 1969). The presence in Victoria of Emsian strata overlying the Snowy River Voleanics restricts the age of this unit to Early Devonian, while the similarity with the Tumut region is further enhanced by the observation of Talent (1965) that granitic rocks intrude the Cowombat Group in Victoria, but are overlain by the Snowy River Voleanies. In the southeastern part of the Cowra Trough, near Bowning and at Cooleman Plains, the rhyolitic Mountain Creek Voleanics, of Early Devonian age, again appear to occupy a similar stratigraphic and structural position to the volcanic formations described above. LEUCOGRANITES OF THE TUMUT DISTRICT Hvidence suggesting the stratigraphic equivalence of the rhyolitic rocks of the Minjary Voleanics, Gatelee Ignimbrite and Buddong Voleanics has been reviewed. Examination of the leucogranitic intrusions spatially related to these volcanics reveals a similar close association. The Bogong Granite (Hall and Relph, 1956) is by far the largest of these ; it outcrops Over an area exceeding 320 km? (see Fig. 1) and has been described in part by Ashley et al. (1971). A composite mass, it intrudes units of the Wiradjuri Voleani¢s as well as the non-voleanic Silurian sequence in the south (Ravine Beds and Cave Creek Limestone). The K—Ar age of 385 m.y. reported by Ashley e¢ al. has been revised (J. R. Richards, pers. comm.) to 410 m.y. to take account of revised decay constant determinations. A deuterically altered specimen of the Bogong Granite analysed at the same time yields a revised age of 390 m.y. which can be confidently considered to be younger than the age of intrusion. These radiometric data indicate that the Bogong and Gocup Granites are of the same age. The Killimicat Adamellite (Ashley et al., 1971) intrudes Silurian rocks to the north of the Bogong Granite. Chemically, petrographically and in hand specimen it is almost identical to large parts of the latter, and Ashley et al. have suggested that it represents a “‘ cupola-like extension ” of the Bogong Granite. The Lobs Hole Adamellite (Adamson, 1957) isasmall granitic body with an out- crop area of less than 3 km* at the south western margin of the Boraig Basin, near the now-submerged locality of Lobs Hole, on the Tumut River. This rock is charac- terised by phenocrysts of alkali feldspar and oligoclase up to 15 mm long that comprise irom 50 to 85% of the mode, with interstitial micrographic quartz- PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, Vow. 101, Part 1 J. P. BARKAS 21 feldspar intergrowths making up the bulk of the remainder. Most of the pheno- crysts are clouded with alteration products ; the margins of many have been resorbed, while others have albitic or micrographic overgrowths. Quartz forms occasional clear, irregular phenocrysts ; biotite and subordinate hornblende jointly account for less than about 5% of the mode and are usually interstitial, but sometimes partly replace or mantle the phenocrysts. This unusual rock appears to be genetically related to the rhyolites of the Buddong Voleanics within which it is situated. The porphyritic nature of the voleanics shows that the lavas and ash flows that formed them contained suspended phenocrysts at the time of extrusion. The textures of the Lobs Hole Adamellite suggest that it formed in a sub-volcanic chamber from a crystal-rich magmatic residue with interstitial rhyolitic liquid, that was not erupted : a multi- stage cooling history is apparent. Variations within the body appear gradational and are due to differing proportions of phenocrysts and interstitial material ; some specimens (e.g. no. 9, Table 1) represent little more than a welded mass of phenocryst fragments. Contact metamorphism around the Bogong Granite and Kilimicat Adamellite is more marked in places than that adjacent to the Gocup Granite. It is eommon in the Lachlan Fold Belt for the degree of thermal metamorphism by the Murrum- bidgee-type granites of Vallance (1969) and their associated leucogranites to be dependent on the nature of the country rocks as well as on the temperature difference across the contact. The Bogong Granite intrudes a variety of lithologies and illustrates this proposition : in psammopelitic rocks of the Bumbolee Creek and Ravine Beds, for example, contact effects are generally very slight ; similarly the rhyodacites of the Wiradjuri Voleanics exhibit recrystallisation and growth of secondary biotite clusters visible in hand specimen only within a few tens of metres of the contact. Elsewhere, however, the Bogong Granite intrudes the Coolac Serpentinite and associated basic rocks, and extensive high-grade hornfelses are developed (Ashley et al., 1971), while to the south, massive andradite-heden- bergite and andradite-magnetite skarns are present in the belt of undifferentiated Silurian rocks shown on Fig. 1. At Black Perry Mountain (8 km west of Talbingo) and elsewhere, these skarns occur up to 3 km from the exposed margin of the granite. Basie and silicified hornfelses make up the Wermatong Amphibolite of Adamson (1960a) which appears to correspond on the western margin of the Bogong Granite to some of the metamorphosed basic rocks recorded by Ashley et al. (1971) on the eastern side. The Wermatong Amphibolite and the basic rocks within the Goobarragandra Beds are taken to be part of the newly-defined Wiradjuri Voleanies. Buacks FLAT DIORITE To the north of the main outerop area of the Gatelee Ignimbrite, a diorite stock intrudes both the Bullawyarra Schist and Blowering Beds. This body was mapped in detail by Thrum (1972) who named it the Blacks Flat Diorite.. It has an outcrop area of about 4 km? that is irregular in shape, but elongated north- south. Much of the body is composed of a medium-grained diorite whose two main mineral constituents are sodic oligoclase and hornblende, the former nearly always dominant ; the content of potassium feldspar is variable, ranging up to about 20% of the mode. Quartz, sphene, apatite, magnetite, allanite and zircon are almost constant accessories, while small amounts of chloritised biotite, calcite and epidote are often present as secondary phases. The hornblende is hastingsitic with 2V,~55°, “*e~29° and marked pleochroism (X =very pale yellow-green, Y =yellow-green, Z=—deep green). Its composition, determined by microprobe analysis, is Ko -agNa-5gCAy-g5Fes-5¢MN9-97MSo-o¢T ig 15Alp 37 (Sig Al, -gO22) (OH,F)>. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrntry or New Sours WAtgES. Vow. 101, Part 1 22 STRATIGRAPHIC RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. Most of this hornblende is present as subhedral, elongate grains that are sometimes clustered ; intergrowths with potassium feldspar and inclusions of sphene and apatite are common. Much of the feldspar is pink in hand specimen ; microscopic examination shows this to be due to a very fine clouding of most grains with alteration products. By contrast the hornblende is generally free from any signs of alteration. ' Contact effects of the Blacks Flat Diorite appear limited to a partial recrystal- lisation and hardening of the country rocks within a zone never more than about 10 m wide. Xenoliths of partly-recrystallised country rock are common throughout the intrusion and apparent roof pendants up to 600 m across have been mapped by Thrum (1972). The mass is noticeably finer-grained and somewhat porphyritie near its southern end and, to the north and south, several satellitic and dyke-like bodies of similar dioritic rocks intrude the surrounding Bullawyarra Sechist. All these features suggest that, like the Gocup Granite, this body is exposed at a level not far below its original roof. As Thrum (1972) pointed out, the Blacks Flat Diorite intrudes part of the Blowering Beds and is thus no older than Late Silurian. On the available chemical and petrographic evidence, however, it is not genetically related to the Early Devonian intrusive rocks described elsewhere in this paper, although it does appear to occupy a somewhat analogous crustal position. CHEMICAL DATA Seventeen bulk-rock analyses of relevance to the discussion in this paper are listed in Table 1. No previous chemical data have been published on the Gocup Granite, Minjary Voleanics, Lobs Hole Adamellite or Boraig Group, but the analyses of the Bogong Granite, Killimicat Adamellite and Gatelee Ignimbrite presented here should be considered in association with those of these units tabulated by Ashley e¢ al. (1971) and Ashley and Basden (1973). When this is done, a clear chemical coherence is apparent among the members of the two igneous associations (leucogranites and rhyolites) described in this paper, as is the similarity between these two groups. A detailed study of a much larger number of analyses will form the subject of a subsequent paper. ; Of the Bogong Granite analyses, numbers 4 and 5 in Table 1 represent biotite leucogranites typical of the pluton as a whole, while 6 and 7 are of variants of very limited areal extent. The atypical (e.g. high TiO,, Sr, Zr ; low SiO,, Rb) and variable composition of the Lobs Hole Adamellite (nos 8, 9, 10) reflect its unusual, partly cumulus origin. These analyses, however, show interesting similarities to that of a rhyodacite unusually rich in feldspar phenocrysts from the Gatelee [gnimbrite (no. 11). The Middle Devonian Cumberland Rhyolite lies at the top of the volcanic succession in the Boraig Basin and so is appreciably younger than, but conformable with, the rhyolites of the Buddong Voleanics. Its analysis (no. 15), however, stands clearly apart from those of the rhyolites considered here to be co-genetic. Similarly, the Blacks Flat Diorite may be distinguished from the other granitic analyses on many counts, perhaps the most striking of which is its SrO content of 0-29 weight per cent. STRATIGRAPHIC SYNTHESIS A stratigraphic scheme consistent with the radiometric, palaeontological and structural data discussed in this paper is shown in Fig. 2. The Gocup Granite, Killimicat Adamellite and Lobs Hole Adamellite all have petrographic and chemical analogues in the composite Bogong Granite and in the light of the coherent radiometric and structural data, these plutons are considered to comprise a post-tectonic sub-voleanic leucogranite association of Early (or Earliest) Devonian age. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vout. 101, Part 1 J. P. BARKAS Awi-x Aq sosdpeuy "999609 “WH “FnUIN], Jo'N uy gs ‘oyoId, Ye_Y SHOU “(19F8h) OFAOTT “LT 868369 WH “OSUIGTeL Jo-ASS UA G-_ “seseg osurqiey, -(EgzsP) (pepessep Ayperzed ‘oryrahydsod) yyesvq oisepuy °9T "969969 “UH “OSUIqI®L, Jo “ASS WY TT ‘oywoAyY pueprequmy -(p8zsF) COA “GT. ‘909189 “ED “OSUIG[eT, Jo "ANA UY Eg ‘soruBojoA suoppng *(O8zsF) OITOAYA OIpTAquETUST “FT ‘SP9SI9 UH ‘“urequnoy Avelurp, jog urgog ‘soruvojoa Aavlury *(Z9zRF) ogtoAYA oIgtAAYdIOg “ET "199089 "UH “yun, Jo -N wy YG] “opyaquirusy copoyey *(SezgF) oWfoAYI popue_ “ZT Z99GC9 “WO “Gnumy jo°N wy eT ‘oplaquarusy oejoyeyy §*(L¢Z8F) sysAroouoYd azedspyey ut Yors ATTensnun ‘eyroepoAyY “TT ‘P8SSE9 WO ‘oourepy soH sqoT *([9Z8F) oWTURASOONET, o1IAYdouBAS ‘orIAYdIOg “OT “Ps8ess9 WO “opjowepy eo sqoT ‘(Q9ZBF) OUBIZOONE] o1rAYdouBAS ‘orAYydI0g °§ “$8989 “WD ‘eq[owmepy oH sqo7T ‘(6ezgPF) oUeISOONO] o1sAYdouRs ‘omtIAYydiog “8 ‘L69SE9 “WO “ynuny, jo 'qs wye¢-9T ‘opUBIH SuOSOgG ‘(L8zgP) OFUBAIS O4140Iq OpUE[quIOF] *1 ‘989FE9 “WO “gnuIny, Jo -q wy gy ‘osvyd [eursiep, ‘“oqrueIg SuOSog (OPZEP) oyUeISOONOT 991401q pourBis-ouT °9 “SE9FS9 SO “quuNy jo-yg uy FL ‘opuerg Suos0g ‘(68zgF) oFUBISOONO] OIOIG “G "819669 "UH “ynumMy, Jo "TSG uy ZZ oyuerp Ssuosog (ZPzgP) oWUAsoonE] oI VOI “F ‘Te9cs9 “WH “UN, Jo N Wy ZI ‘opffouepy yeormy[ry “(PETeP) eyuMersoone] eq4org “€ ‘SP9SI9 WH “you Jo-aAN uryg-g ‘oyuerg dnooy +(1HZR8PF) opUBIdOONE] O91N0IG °Z ‘OFOFLO “MD “Qnuny, jo°y wyg ‘oqyuerg dnooy ‘(gPZgF) ogtUBISOONOT onord > Loy *(uorgsnqutoo) *OO ‘(Agoumtaeis) OFF ‘(Arqeut1444) Qe ‘(uotydazosqe o1u1078) O*eN I0z ydooxe ‘ArjoUIOAy00ds oouUsoser0NTy ‘(9961 ‘UopnoyyT puv uosuepY) 0008S * T 91808 “Jooys [BoIBofoos eBSe A, BIS A\ OY} UOT pojonb ore seoussejoa plug “AoupAg Jo Ayisoatuy) ‘soisAydoesy pue ASopoor) Jo quouredoq oy} JO suotjoo][oo pue onSo[eyeo oY} 0} seyer (soYoVAG UT) sdequINU UOUTTOEds oMSY-OATT OL OFZ FOL ihyita 00z O&T G9 GS OT LOT 09% had CsI G0Z =: 00% Pie ee as: G0 E1Z OLZ COT GIG CFS oge 00F O°F OFS OZT 891 E8I 981 OZI F61 IZ OSFZ Ee O&Z OLT 00z 008 €8S OFS LOT ZLI 601 98 9¢ 68 GL IL Ig ge oge 9g BE I? LP OL L9 99 oF 8% FF 6F 8¢ Gg oP x ‘ur'd'd ut syuoureje o0Bry, 8€:-66 9-66 18-66 60-001 8-66 16-66 O0L:66 69°66 LP-66 €8:66 36:66 FF:66 6-001 06°66 98-66 68-66 IL:66 °° I®I°L $2:0 66:0 ZO-T 80-0 80-0 "00 8F-0 LE-0 20:0 0-0 90:0 0:0 31:0 &2:0 OF:0 ZI:0 80:0 30:0 90-0 20:0 0:0 62:0 02:0 °° 70%d GL-0 OL FI-0 ~ 98-0 36:0 08:0 9F:0 89:0 90-l ZrO G8-0 IT1-0 82-0 81:0 61:0 20:0 &2:0 "OLL 60:0 91:0 61-0 &T-0 81:0 91:0 08-0 2:0 02:0 I€:0 60:0 31:0 20-0 CI-0 1:0 LI-:0 91-0 > OVE IGS: §@:I 29:0 9&9¢-T 94:0 19:0 OL-T 8L:T L8:L &2-I OF-0 08:0 96:0 cf-0 8-0 06:0 &I-T (OL GO-S PSL €9:°9 G6F-G 6h-9 GLP 6° PES 19-0 ThE EL-& I8-— 6E-F L6:b 69°F 69:b 9F-G °° OM 66:F §6-G LI-€ 66-¢ Ol Gee TE eh aoc le. e CO Ohh Onc pac Vere FG'€ GOS E8-E& Bes O°8N 6o-9 12:6 1-0 ¥F-0 19:0 06:0 86:3 69° O%:F 98:0 61:3 28:0 LET 86:0 86:0 6€:0 #F§-0 O80 92° CO-b €2:0 &GF-0 29:0 9-0 18:0 18:0 Z20:l 26:0 09:0 02:0 19¢:0 Z1:0 18:0 ST-0 0¢-0 Os 61:0 61:0 0:0 10:0 90:0 0:0 80:0 60:0 €i:0 0:0 20:0 90:0 #0:0 60:0 20-0 30:0 £€0-0 OUIN to:'F FI-9 G6-0 89-0 89: 9:0 L&I 69: 6F:S 86-LT I8°T 09:0 Z&:I 19:0 8:0 9F-0 LL-T Pe OOU Gr al Shiges 98 Oe een L¥-0 &3:T 16:T 86:IT 06:3 L9:It 9-0 #$F:0 38-0 93:0 68:0 8&0 99:0 °° *O%o4 OG-LT GL-ST Gé-CL O8-FI 8I-ZI O3-SI 2-91 9C-FI 86-FL ZS:Fl I6-El TS-SI OL-SI1 OG:ZI IL:SI €9:EL FL°SL °° SOV F6°FS GL:SG CL‘GL FE-3L Gh PL SL:SL 10:99 F8-F9 68:09 FI'IL GI-SL G8-GL I1-FL 91-9L 89:SL I8-FL T0'FL °° “OW LI 91 CT FI &I ral II OT 6 8 L 9 ¢ F € z I q0ULSUp INUNT, 247 fo syo01 snoaube aos 4of nIDp poorMayH [ SIavy, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watzs, Vou. 101, Part 1 V.S.W. LATIONS, TUMUT REGION, RE 1 } *TRAPHIC STRATIC "[ ‘Si Os[® Gog *(9/BoS 07 YOU) *\A\"g'N ‘WOLder gnu, ey} UT suOTyBlor oLydwIsYBAYS UBIUOAEC]-oINTIG Jo YoIOYY °z “Shy Astyos ezzeAmeT [ng ‘Speq YeeTD saetToqumg “TOUT e7eI4S poeUZOyeq “O39 ‘4sTYyOS OTsSeq ‘su0zSATTS ‘aqtTTAyd ueTANTTS --+ +ds saproyzeubhTog *39 sSouojSoury Y29AD aaeD pue ATT tqobuezzex ‘spog ouTarey Tieheel -yo eurpoyreEzoO “ suezsuoout PT [epouoyoT IL *ToOUT ejeIA4S ueTANTTS. SSAA ea NVIYNIIS NWINOAgG ; 4 acINwup’4'4| 80> 2S/qu OTh 4¥/x + + + + aqoogt , + OTP 2u/x es 7qLINwig > ae eer ae Sab 4 9NO90d + + + FRIIS 4L,NSI daTaLvo LADAADAADAAA] “SOINWOTOA 4, , KYVONIWA ; A ICN IT aLITIaWvaw ES A A 4IOH SHOT A AKAAAKAAAAAAA AKKAKKAKAAAAAA ANKARKANAAKNA AARKAAA seeeee THONDeL eeTTaTTemoy AKKAKAKAKA JSNENINS CAVE TN: KAM ALINOIG NAUS LWTd SHOWIE dNowd FONWa dNOud SIVvdod NOUWA AZTIOH SHOT / OONTETWL DLOWOL ocrIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES Voz. LOY, Part 1 NNEAN § PROCEEDINGS OF THE Li J. P. BARKAS 25 The absolute age of the Silurian-Devonian boundary is as equivocal as its lithostratigraphic position (Philip, 1974). Brooks and Leggo (1972) quote 413 and 430 m.y. as possible limiting values, but the latter estimate, although based on “‘ local ” data from the Canberra area (Bofinger et al., 1970) may well be subject to stratigraphic imprecision (Talent et al., 1975, p. 27). An age for the boundary of between 410 and 415 m.y. would appear acceptable in the light of the data summarised by Lambert (1971), and indeed such an age is suggested by this study. In any case, a close temporal relationship exists between the leucogranite and rhyolite associations and, as the volcanism partly overlaps in age and partly postdates the granite emplacement, it may represent the culmination of an Early — Devonian episode of high-level acid magmatism. The older the absolute age of the Siluro-Devonian boundary, the more restricted must have been the duration of this magmatic episode. By Middle Devonian time, volcanic activity had resumed in the Boraig Basin with the eruption of the Talbingo Basalt and Cumber- land Rhyolite after a break represented stratigraphically by the sediments of the Saddle Tuff and Landers Creek Formation, described by Moye et al. (1969). Thus it may be postulated that the Buddong Volcanics, Gatelee Ignimbrite and Minjary Voleanics represent the extrusive equivalents of the Bogong Granite, Lobs Hole Adamellite, Killimicat Adamellite and Gocup Granite. In this regard, the Minjary Voleanics and the outcrop areas of the Gatelee Ignimbrite show a sub-radial distribution around the two northernmost plutons that may well be genetically significant. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I wish to thank Associate Professor T. G. Vallance for critically reading the manuscript, and Dr. E. A. K. Middlemost for many helpful discussions. The X-ray fluorescence analyses were carried out in the School of Earth Sciences, Macquarie University, where special thanks are due to my colleague, Mr 8. Dobos. Mr I. G. Percival assisted with the identification of the brachiopods. References Apamson, C. L., 1957.—Reconnaissance geology of the Snowy Mountains area. Progress report 10. Tumbarumba. Tech. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W., 2 (for 1954) : 7-15. , 1960a.—Reconnaissance geology of the Snowy Mountains area. Progress report 16. Tumut. Tech. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W., 5 (for 1957) : 1388-154. , 19606.—The geology of Burrangong Shire. Tech. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W., 5 (for 1957) : 155-162. — and Loupon, A. G., 1966.—Geological sheet, Wagga Wagga, N.S.W. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Sydney. : AsHLEY, P. M., CHENHALL, B. E., Cremer, P. L., and Irvine, A. J., 1971.—The geology of the Coolac Serpentinite and adjacent rocks east of Tumut, New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 104 : 11-29. and BaspEn, H., 1973.—Revision of nomenclature of granitic intrusions at Burrinjuck, Young and Cowra. fec. geol. Surv. N.S.W., 15 (2) : 213-220. Baspen, H., 1974.—Preliminary report on the geology of the Cootamundra 1 : 100,000 sheet. 'Q. Notes geol. Surv. N.S.W., 15: 7-18. Borineer, V. M., Compston, W., and Guuson, B. L., 1970.—A Rb-Sr study of the Lower Silurian State Circle Shale, Canberra, Australia. Geochim. cosmochim. Acta, 34 : 433-445. BravDtey, G. M., 1968.—The geology of the Upper Gilmore Creek district, north east of Batlow, N.S.W. B.Sc. Hons thesis (unpubl.), Dept Geol. Geophys., Univ. Sydney. Brooks, C., and Lecco, M. D., 1972.—The local chronology and regional implications of a Rb-Sr investigation of granitic rocks from the Corryong District, southeastern Australia. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 19 : 1-19. Brown, I. A., 1941.—The stratigraphy and structure of the Silurian and Devonian rocks of the Yass-Bowning district, New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 74 : 312-341. Carne, J. E., and Jonss, L. J., 1919.—The limestone deposits of New South Wales. Mzner. Resour. N.S.W., 25. CuaTTERTON, B. D. E., 1973.—Brachiopods of the Murrumbidgee Group, Taemas, New South Wales. Bur. Miner. Resour. Geol. Geophys. Aust. Bull., 137. Dux, W. S8., 1901.—Report of a collection of fossils from the foot of Minjary Mountain, Tumut. Ann. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W., (for 1900) : 185, 195. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 1 26 STRATIGRAPHIC RELATIONS, TUMUT REGION, N.S.W. Frercuer, H, O., 1961.—Palaeontological determinations, 1958. Tech. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W.., 6 (for 1958) :; 116. Haut, L. R., and Renen, R. E., 1956.—Reconnaissance geology of the Snowy Mountains area. ' Progress report 9. Talbingo-Tumut. Tech. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W., 1 (for 1953) : 9-13.- LAMBERT, R.StJ., 1971.—The pre-Pleistocene Phanerozoic time-scale—a review. In The Phanerozoie time-scale—a supplement. Spec. Publ. geol. Soc. Lond., 5: 9-31. Linx, A. G., and Drucr, E. C., 1972.—Ludlovian and Gedinnian conodont stratigraphy of the Yass Basin, New South Wales. Bur. Miner. Resour. Geol. Geophys. Aust. Bull., 134. Moyer, D. G., SHarp, K. R., and Startepon, D. H., 1969.—Lower and Middle Devonian Series, Snowy Mountains area. Jn The geology of New South Wales. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 16: 143— 146. Nicort, R. S., and Rexroap, C. B., 1974.—Llandovery (Silurian) conodonts from southern New South Wales. (Abstract) Geol. Soc. Am. Abst. Prog., 6: 534. PackHam, G. H., (Ed.) 1969.—The geology of New South Wales. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 16: 1-654. Prine, G. M., 1974.—Biostratigraphic procedures and correlation in the Tasman geosynclinal zone. In The Tasman Geosyncline—a symposium. Geol. Soc. Aust., Queensl. Div., pp. 295-, 312. Ryaty, W. R., 1965.—The geology of the Canowindra East area, N.S.W. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W.,: 98 : 169-179. ScHEIBNER, E., 1973.— A plate tectonic model of the Palaeozoic tectonic history of New South: Wales. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 20 : 405-426. , 1974.—Tectonic map of New South Wales, scale 1: 1,000,000. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Sydney. STEPHENS, W. J., 1882.—Note and exhibit—Rocks and fossils from the western coal-fields and Siluro-Devonian brachiopods from Yass and the Minjary Ranges, near Tumut. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 7: 560. Srevens, N. C., 1952.—The petrology of the Cowra intrusion and associated xenoliths. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 132-141. Srrusz, D. L., 1971.—Explanatory notes, Canberra 1: 250,000 geological sheet. Bur. Miner.. Resour. Geol. Geophys. Aust., Canberra. 47 pp. , and 13 others, 1972.—Correlation of the Lower Devonian rocks of Australasia. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 18 : 427-455. Tatent, J. A., 1965.—The stratigraphic and diastrophic evolution of central and eastern Victoria in middle Palaeozoic times. Proc. R. Soc. Vict., 79 : 179-195. , Berry, W. B. N., Boucot, A. J., PackHam, G. H., and Biscuorr, G. C. O., 1975.— Correlation of the Silurian rocks of Australia, New Zealand and New Guinea. Spec. Pap. geol. Soc. Am., 150: 1-108. Turum, D. P., 1972.—The geology of an area between Brungle and Darbalara in New South Wales. B.Sc. Hons thesis (unpubl.), Dept. Geol. Geophys., Univ. Sydney. Trypate, N. B., 1940.—Distribution of Australian Aboriginal tribes: a field survey. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., 64 : 140-231. VALLANCE, T. G., 1953.—Studies in the metamorphic and plutonic geology of the Wantabadgery- Adelong-Tumbarumba district, N.S.W. Part I. Introduction and metamorphism of the sedimentary rocks. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 78 : 90-121. , 1969.—Plutonic and metamorphic rocks, Southern and Central Highlands fold belt. In The geology of New South Wales. JJ. geol. Soc. Aust., 16 : 180-200. Wauiser, O. H., 1964.—Conodonten des Silurs. Hess. Landesamt Bodenforsch. Abh., 41 : 1-106. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vout. 101, Part 1 THE GENERA CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUESSART AND CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS FAIN (ACARI: ATOPOMELIDAE), PARASITES OF PHALANGEROID MARSUPIALS IN AUSTRALASIA ALEX FAIN* and ROBERT DOMROWT [Accepted for publication 17th December 1975 | Synopsis The little known type-species of Campylochirus Trouessart, Campylochirus chelopus Trouessart from Pseudocheirus peregrinus (Boddaert) in Tasmania, is re-examined. . Material from the same host and locality subsequently assigned to this species is shown to be composite, comprising Campylochirus (Campylochirus) brevipenis, n. sp., and Campylochiropsis micrura Fain and Domrow. Schoinobates volans (Kerr) is listed as a new (and more likely) host for Campylochirus (Campylo- chiroides) antechinus Fain, originally described from museum specimens of various Australian dasyurid marsupials. Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) sthenophallus, n. sp., is described from S. volans in Victoria. New morphological data are given for Campylochiropsis dolichurus (Fain), also from S. volans, and for Campylochiropsis misonnet Fain from Pseudocheirus sp. in Irian Jaya. No new data are available for the three other known Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) spp. : C. pseudocheirus Fain (Pseudocheirus forbesi Thomas, New Guinea), C. petauricola Fain (Petaurus breviceps Waterhouse, Victoria and Irian Jaya), and C. caparti Fain (Pseudocheirus sp., Irian Jaya). The necessary illustrations and descriptions are given, thereby affording a revision of the closely related genera Campylochirus and Campylochiropsis, all species of which parasitise petaurid marsupials in Australasia. The Australian phalangeroid marsupials carry several atopomelid genus- eroup taxa characterised in part by a relatively full complement of dorsal shields (see Fain and Domrow, 1974, for terminology), the migration of the normally basal solenidion of tibiotarsi III to a distal position (Fain, 1972), and, in the g, by adanal organs and incrassate legs IV. The first to be described was Campylochirus Trouessart, the history of which is complex enough to bear summary. Its type-species, Campylochirus chelopus Trouessart, was briefly described without illustrations by Trouessart (1893, 1917) from Pseudocheirus peregrinus (Boddaert) (—Pseudocheirus convolutor (Oken) = Phalangista cooki Desmarest), the only representative of this genus in Tasmania. In August 1956, Lawrence described Cricetomysia andrei, n. g., n. sp., from specimens in the Trouessart collection labelled as from Cricetomys gambianus, West Africa. Earlier, in April of the same year, Domrow (1956b) described the 3, 2, and nymph of a species he identified as Campylochirus chelopus from specimens collected on the type-host in Tasmania. In 1958, Domrow noted that his description and figures corresponded well with those of Cricetomysia andret and concluded that the specimens described by Lawrence could only be the lost syntypes of Campylochirus chelopus, but that they had become mislabelled since Trouessart’s time. Fain (1971, 1972), in his revision of the Listrophoroidea of Australix and New Guinea, reproduced the illustrations of the g and 2 given by Don row (1956b), because enquiry at likely institutions had failed to locate the specimcns on which they were based. This seemed satisfactory until Domrow recently obtained both sexes of two atopomelid species from Pseudocheirus peregrinus in Tasmania and Victoria and concluded that the species he had earlier described as Campylochirus chelopus was * Institut de Médecine Tropicale Prince Léopold, Antwerp, Belgium. + Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Herston, Queensland, 4006. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WAtss, Vot. 101, Part 1 28 CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUESSART AND CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS FAIN composite, the ¢ representing his conception of Campylochirus chelopus, and the 2 and nymph representing a new species briefly described as Campylochiropsis micrura by Fain and Domrow (Fain, 1974). The examination of six of Domrow’s original specimens (on a slide since located in the Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg, by Mr B. Lamoral) confirmed this finding. A re-examination of Trouessart’s types seemed essential and this was kindly facilitated by Mr M. Naudo, Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris. In brief, Campylochirus chelopus Trouessart is closely related to, but distinct from, Campylochirus chelopus Domrow. It is the purpose of this paper to record the corrections involving the three species and two closely related atopomelid genera mentioned above, to describe another new species of Campylochirus, and to provide further data on three of the other six known species in the complex. All species are from members of the family Petauridae (Laurie and Hill, 1954 ; Ride, 1970). All measurements are in um. The material listed is deposited in various institutions abbreviated : Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra ANIC British Museum (Natural History), London BMNH Institut de Médecine Tropicale Prince Léopold, Antwerp IMTPL Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Brussels IRSNB Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris MNHN Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg NM Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Brisbane QIMR Queensland Museum, Brisbane QM Genus CAMPYLOCHIRUS Trouessart Campylochirus Trouessart, 1893 : 698. Type-species Campylochirus chelopus Trouessart. Cricetomysia Lawrence, 1956: 355. Type-species Oricetomysia andrei Lawrence. Definition. Both sexes with four dorsal shields of which the postscapular is devoid of strongly sclerotised transverse bands posteriorly ; coxae III and IV normally placed. Female without any external copulatory tube. Male with genitalia set between trochanters IV ; legs IV moderately to strongly swollen, with suckers on tibiotarsi IV reduced in latter case. Subgenus CAMPYLOCHIRUS Trouessart Definition. Male with penis cylindrical, long to very long, and describing at least one curve ; body provided with complex transparent membrane posteriorly ; legs IV strongly swollen, with shortened tibiotarsi IV bearing reduced suckers. Female with two lateral shields on opisthogaster ; opisthonotal shield in Shape of T, flanked on either side by an elongate depressed zone that is neither punctate nor sealy. Campylochirus (Campylochirus) chelopus Trouessart (Figs 1-4) Campylochirus chelopus Trouessart, 1893 : 699, 1917 : 154 ; Domrow, 1956a : 191. Nee Domrow, 1956b : 234, 1958 : 43 ; Fain, 1972 : 122. Cricetomysia andrei Lawrence, 1956 : 356 ; Domrow, 1958 : 43. ns Material. Two gg and one 2, mislabelled (in Trouessart’s handwriting) Cricetomys gambianus Waterhouse (Rodentia : Muridae), West Africa, but said by Trouessart to have come from Pseudocheirus peregrinus (Boddaert), Tasmania (MNHN). Two 3, same data (NM). ; PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF New Soutu Watzs, Vot. 101, Part 1 A. FAIN AND R. DOMROW 29 One ¢ (MNHN) (that figured by Lawrence, 1956) is designated lectotype and the remaining four specimens paralectotypes of Campylochirus chelopus (Rees 74B and EB). Although Lawrence (pers. comm.) did not select a holotype for Cricetomysia andrei, no type designation seems necessary now, since it is an objective junior synonym of Trouessart’s species. Male lectotype (Figs 1-2). Length (including capitulum) 330; maximum width 153. Prescapular shield subcircular, sclerotised except marginally. Postseapular shield shallowly concave anteriorly. Hysteronotal shield with few seales laterally. Opisthonotal shield posteriorly with median design formed by O,7mm Figs 1-2. Campylochirus (Campylochirus) chelopus lectotype §. 1. Dorsum. 2. Venter. short longitudinal line bearing several short arborescences ; posteriorly with two paramedian setose prominences and two lateral bifid processes. Coxae III confluent, with straight longitudinal sclerite medially. Penis describing two turns of 180° and long enough for distal half to be displaced 45° laterally in mounted specimens ; total length 186. Anus flanked by pair of oval adanal organs, each carrying small curved spine posteriorly. Legs IV strongly swollen, with tibiotarsi IV quite short and carrying reduced sucker on short peduncle. Genua IV with strong distal boss directed dorsally. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoOcrIETY oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 1 30 CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUESSART AND CAMPY LOCHIROPSIS FAIN Female paralectotype (Figs 3-4). Length (including capitulum) 366 ; maximum width 144. This specimen contains an egg with thin shell, 177 x 47. Anterior three dorsal shields as in g. Opisthonotal shield in form of T, falling well short of vestibule of bursa copulatrix. Cuticle scaly on either side of shield except for longitudinal textureless gutter. Bursa copulatrix with broad vestibule opening dorsally 27 from end of body ; bursa relatively long, dilated past mid- length, and then sharply narrowed and more sclerotised towards internal aperture ; total length 153, length of very narrow portion 45. Cuticle smooth in 3 = igs 3-4. Campylochirus (Campylochirus) chelopus paralectotype 9. 3. Dorsum. - venter. front of vestibule, but scaly behind and beside it. Propodosoma ventrally as in @. Coxae III punctate, separated in front by punctate band. Coxae IV confluent, at least posteriorly. Opisthogaster entirely scaly, with small punctate shiel either side. Anus subterminal. Se P een i Notes. he above description supplements that of Lawrence (1956) and is based solely on specimens that are at once the syntypes of C locht and Cricetomysia andrei. oe CNS aie See also notes on Campylochirus brevipenis below. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety or New SourH Wates, Vot. 101, Part 1 A. FAIN AND R. DOMROW 31 Campylochirus (Campylochirus) brevipenis, n. sp. (Figs 5-7) Campylochirus chelopus Domrow, 19566 : 234 (f and nymph), 1958: 43 (g and nymph) ; Fain, 1972 : 122 (gand nymph). Nec Trouessart, 1893 : 699, 1917 : 154 ; Domrow, 1956a : 191. Material. Holotype and three paratype gd, allotype and six paratype 99, Pseudocheirus peregrinus, Dartmouth, Vic., 22.xi.1973, I. Beveridge; two paratype g¢ and four paratype 2°, Pseudocheirus peregrinus, Launceston, Tas., 1.x.1973, R.H. Green. Holotype and allotype in ANIC; paratypes in IMTPL and QIMR. As noted above, some material (one ¢) Domrow (1956) figured and described from the same host, Woodbury, Tas., has been recovered (NM). Figs 5-7. Campylochirus (Campylochirus) brevipenis. 5. Venter holotype ¢. 6. Adanal organ g. 7. Dorsum allotype 9 Male holotype (Figs 5-6). This specimen is flattened and broken in two, but its length (including capitulum) does not exceed 350 nor its maximum width 120. In two paratypes, these dimensions are 285 x 120 and 308x126. Dorsum and venter as in Campylochirus chelopus except for very much shorter penis (which describes only one turn of 180°) and slightly different shape of aggenital sclerites. Maximum length of penis 77 in holotype, 72, 75, and 81 in three paratypes. Female allotype (Fig. 7). Length (including capitulum) 338; maximum width 125. Dorsum as in Campylochirus chelopus, but hysteronotal shield Somewhat narrower at midlength and with urn-shaped accessory shieldlet in front of vestibule of bursa copulatrix. Bursa very narrow throughout (beyond vestibule), not expanded near midlength ; total length only 96 in allotype, 90, 92, and 94 in three paratypes. Notes. The new species is closely related to Campylochirus chelopus, but is readily separable in both sexes by the genitalic characters noted in the description. Subgenus CAMPYLOCHIROIDES Fain Campylochiroides Fain, 1971: 240. Type-species Campylochirus (Campylo- chiroides) antechinus Fain. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 1 32 CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUESSART AND CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS FAIN Definition. Male with penis short to very short, directed backwardly without describing any curve; body without any membrane posteriorly ; legs IV moderately swollen, with normal tibiotarsi [V bearing normal suckers. Female with either a median or no shield on opisthogaster ; opisthonotal shield not flanked by depressed textureless zones. Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) antechinus Fain Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) antechinus Fain, 1971 : 241, 1972 : 126. Material. Six $$ and one 9, Schoinobates volans (Kerr) (=Petauroides volans (Kerr)), Dartmouth, Vic., 20.1.1974, I. Beveridge, represent a new (and more likely) host-record. In IMTPL ; type-series in BMNH and IMTPL. The type-series is from museum specimens of various Australian dasyurid marsupials (Dasyuroidea) and, in the light of the present record and the host- relationships of all other species in the complex, may well comprise contaminants. Female. Bursa copulatrix narrow and weakly sclerotised, 180 long in one paratype from Antechinus stuartii Macleay (—A. unicolor Gould, see Wakefield and Warneke (1967)), and describing 4-5 curves. Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) sthenophallus, n. sp. (Figs 8-9) Material. Holotype 3, allotype 2, and two paratype 34, Schoinobates volans (Kerr), Dartmouth, Vic., 20.1.1974, I. Beveridge. Holotype and allotype in ANIC ; paratypes in IMTPL and QIMR. Male holotype (Fig. 9). Length (including capitulum) 302 ; maximum width 135. General facies as in Campylochirus antechinus, but genitalia considerably more complex. Penis proper 18 long, flanked by two elongate formations of similar length, all three travelling within stout U-shaped sclerite. Behind penis lie two strong paramedian elongate-triangular sclerites ; these, U-shaped sclerites, and complex structure supporting base of penis all lacking in Campylo- chirus antechinus. Female allotype (Fig. 8). Length (including capitulum) 315; maximum width 137. General facies as in Campylochirus antechinus, but bursa copulatrix thick-set, about 300 long, and describing several curves. Internal aperture of bursa dilated, 12-14 long. Vestibule not discernible. Notes. The new species is closely related to Campylochirus antechinus, but is readily separable in both sexes by the genitalic characters notes in the description. Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) pseudocheirus Fain Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) pseudocheirus Fain, 1972 : 128. Material. Type-series from Pseudocheirus forbesi Thomas, Papua New Guinea (BMNH and IMTPL). One 9 from Pseudocheirus sp., Irian Jaya (IMTPL). Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) petauricola Fain Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) petauricola Fain, 1972 : 131. Material. Type-series from Petaurus breviceps papuanus Thomas, Irian Jaya, and Petaurus breviceps Waterhouse, Victoria (BMNH). Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) caparti Fain Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) caparti Fain, 1974 : 14. Material. Type-series from Pseudocheirus sp., Irian Jaya (IRSNB). Genus CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS Fain _ Campylochiropsis Fain, 1972: 120. Type-species Campylochirus (Campylo- chiropsis) dolichurus Fain. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Wates, Von. 101, Part 1 A. FAIN AND R. DOMROW 33 Definition. Both sexes with four dorsal shields of which the postscapular shows two strongly sclerotised, but medially interrupted, bands posteriorly ; coxae IV widely separated from coxae III. Female with long external copulatory tube. Male with genitalia displaced anteriorly, set either between, or in front of, trochanters III ; legs IV only slightly swollen, sometimes shortened, but always with normal suckers on tibiotarsi IV. 0.1mm Figs 8-9. Campylochirus (Campylochiroides) sthenophallus. 8. Dorsum 2. 9. Genitalia 3. Fig. 10. Campylochiropsis dolichurus 3. Venter. Campylochiropsis dolichurus (Fain) (Fig. 10) Campylochirus (Campylochiropsis) dolichurus Fain, 1972 : 123. Material. Eleven g¢ and ten 99 from type-host, Schoinobates volans (Kerr), Dartmouth, Vic., 20.1.1974, I. Beveridge. In IMTPL and QIMR ; type-series in BMNH. Male (Fig. 10). Penis considerably displaced forward, lying between anterior portions of coxae III, at level of setae sh. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WatEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 34 CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUESSART AND CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS FAIN Notes. The position and details of the genitalia could not be seen in the one laterally mounted male in the type-species. Campylochiropsis misonnet Fain Figs. 11-12 Campylochiropsis misonnet Fain, 1974: 16. Material. Two 929 from type-host, Pseudocheirus sp., Jiwika, Irian Jaya (IRSNB). Figs 11-12. Campylochiropsis misonnezt 9. 11. Venter. 12. Dorsum. Female (Figs 11-12). Length (including capitulum, but excluding copulatory tube) 345 ; width (in oblique view) 90. Dorsum as in Campylochiropsis dolichurus, but lacking scales on opisthonotal shield and area behind setae d, smooth. Opisthogaster with ill-defined and lightly punctate shield that lacks scales, though some occur behind it. Copulatory tube 3-4 wide at most, 51 long in one specimen and 57 in other. Bursa copulatrix sclerotised and very narrow over first 10-12, but becoming membranous and wide for 110 before reaching hemispherical internal aperture. Notes. The two females just described come from the same animal as the type-series, which comprised only males. Campylochiropsis micrura Fain and Domrow (Figs 13-16) Campylochirus chelopus Domrow, 1956b : 234 (9), 1958 : 43 (9) ; Fain, 1972 : 122 (2). Nee Trouessart, 1893 : 699, 1917 : 154 ; Domrow, 1956a : 191. Campylochiropsis micrura Fain and Domrow, in Fain, 1974 : 16. Material. Type-series from Pseudocheirus peregrinus, Victoria. Holotype and allotype in QM ; paratypes in IMTPL and QIMR. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrery or New SourH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 1 A. FAIN AND R. DOMROW 35 As noted above, some material (three 29, one g, one nymph) Domrow (1956) figured and described from the same host, Woodbury, Tas., has been recovered (NM). The nymph is associated with the 2 rather than with the g because of the resemblance of legs I and the elongate coxae IV. Two 99 from Petaurus sp., Irian Jaya (IMTPL). Male allotype (Figs 13 and 15). Length (including capitulum) 330 ; ; maximum width 115. Prescapular shield divided into two rectangular halves ; other dorsal shields as in Campylochiropsis dolichurus. Opisthogaster largely obscured by legs IV, but adanal organs present. Penis very small, set between trochanters Ill. Legs IV shorter, but hardly thinner, than legs III; tibiotarsi IV smaller than tibiotarsi IIT. all : [ Mla BN (C He ete Bl Figs 13-14. Campylochiropsis micrura. 13. Dorsum allotype 6. 14. Dorsum holotype 2 Female holotype (Figs 14 and 16). Length (including capitulum, but excluding copulatory tube) 362; maximum width 106. Opisthonotal shield without scales, but cuticle of opisthosoma entirely scaly except central area on opisthogaster. Copulatory tube 90 long. Notes. The preliminary diagnosis of Campylochiropsis micrura given by Fain and Domrow (Fain, 1974) is here supplemented by illustrations and further description. The species is separable from Campylochiropsis misonnet (1) in the male, by the more strongly flared shape of the posterior end of the body (with a consequently much wider separation of the two strong setae thereupon), and by PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, Vor. 101, Part 1 36 CAMPYLOCHIRUS TROUBSSART AND CAMPYLOCHIROPSIS FAIN the absence of an oval sclerotisation around the analia, and (2) in the female, by the more numerous scales on the opisthosoma and by the much longer copulatory tube. ; Further, the species is separable from Campylochiropsis dolichurus (1) in the male, by the absence of strongly modified setae at the posterior end of the body and by the unmodified tibiotarsi IV ; and (2) in the female, by the absence of scales on the opisthonotal shield and by the much shorter copulatory tube. — i a} "kT HS — < \ Qe Figs 15-16. Campylochiropsis micrura. 15. Venter allotype g (with inset of terminalia of Woodbury in lateral view). 16. Venter holotype @. Nomenclature. All ten specific names recognised above are nouns, two genitive (caparti and misonnet), and eight nominative in apposition. ADDENDUM While we accept that parasites are but one possible indicator of host relation- ships, we believe their collection serves as much to accumulate data on their hosts as the measurement of, say, tooth rows. So may we ask our colleagues who handle Australian vertebrates (especially the seldom seen, but even the common please to take time to collect their parasites? A wad of cotton wool soaked in ones, at least in potentially interesting areas such as the limits of their ranges), chloroform and rubbed briskly through the fur of a lightly anaesthetised animal PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watzs, Vou. 101, Part 1 A. FAIN AND R. DOMROW 37 will dislodge a surprisingly good sample of free-roving mites. Soft skin (e.g. feet, perianal region, interior of ear) should be examined for attached mites, and scurfy lesions scraped off. Closer examination of the fur (or feathers, or scales), even by eye, will reveal mites, and, time and material permitting, they may also be found in internal organs (e.g. nasal passages and lungs). See Evans et al. (1961), Fain (1965) and McClure (1966). Material should be stored in ethanol (70% in water, preferably with 5° glycerol to counter hardening), not formalin, together with full, neatly written collection data. Further preparation is best left to the specialist. Acarological data from such collections may be confirmatory (e.g. the species of Trichosurolaelaps on the lower macropodid Hypsiprymnodon belongs with those from phalangerids and petaurids, see Domrow, 1966); indicative of possible value (e.g. the species of Laelaps on ‘‘ old endemic ”’ rodents, see Domrow, 1973, under study) ; or, frankly, of little value (e.g. Mesolaelaps australiensis with its catholic tastes, see Domrow, 1967). We conclude with two points. One, new species of such popular groups as birds are now seldom described, but ‘“‘ we cannot expect .. . to settle all the problems of mite taxonomy .. . for decades to come ”’ (Mayr, 1969). Two, the recent recovery of some ‘‘ lost’? Australian mammals and birds and the chance location of a living colony of the former fossil Burramys give some hope, but the losses documented by Marlow (1958) imply a double extinction, of host and parasite. References Domrow, R., 1956a.—Notes on Australian fur-mites (Listrophoridae, Atopomelinae), with description of anew genus. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 80: 191—200. , 1956b.—The genera Campylochirus Trouessart and Austrochirus Womersley in Australia (Acarina, Listrophoridae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 80 : 234-239. , 1958.—A summary of the Atopomelinae (Acarina, Listrophoridae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 83 : 40-54. , 1966.—Some laelapid mites of syndactylous marsupials. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 90 : 164-175. , 1967.—Mite parasites of small mammals from scrub typhus foci in Australia. Aust. J. Zool., 15 : 759-798. , 1973.—New records and species of Laelaps and allied genera from Australasia (Acari : Dermanyssidae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 98 : 62-85. Evans, G. O., SHEALS, J. G., and MacrarRLaAng, D., 1961.—The terrestrial Acari of the British Isles. Vol. 1. London: British Museum. Fatn, A., 1965.—Quelques aspects de lendoparasitisme par les acariens. Annls Parasit. hum. comp., 40 : 317-327. , 1971.—Notes sur quelques Atopomelidae de la région australienne (Acarina : Listrophoroidea). Revue Zool. Bot. afr., 83 : 238-242. , 1972.—Les listrophoridés d’Australie et de Nouvelle-Guinée (Acarina : Sarecoptiformes). Bull. Inst. r. Sct. nat. Belg., 48(5) : 1-196. , 1974.—Mission zoologique du Fonds Léopold III en Irian (Nouvelle-Guinée Occidentale) : acariens parasites de marsupiaux et de rongeurs (Listrophoroidea). Bull. Inst. r. Sci. nat. Belg., 50(7) : 1-22. , and Domrow, R., 1974.—The subgenus Cytostethum Domrow (Acari : Atopomedlidae) : multiple speciation on the marsupial Potorous tridactylus (Kerr). Aust. J. Zool., 22 : 549-572. Lauri, Eleanor M. D., and Hitt, J. E., 1954.—Lust of land mammals of New Guinea, Celebes and adjacent islands 1758-1952. London : British Museum. LAWRENCE, R. F., 1956.—Studies on South African fur-mites (Trombidiformes and Sarcoptiformes). Ann. Natal Mus., 13 : 337-375. McCuvre, H. E., 1966.—An Asian bird-banders manual. Hong Kong : Migratory Animals Patho- logical Survey. Martow, B. J., 1958.—A survey of the marsupials of New South Wales. C.SJ.R.O. Wildl. Res., 3: 71-114. Mayr, E., 1969.—Principles of systematic zoology. New York : McGraw-Hill. Ripe, W. D. L., 1970.—A guide to the native mammals of Australia. Melbourne : Oxford University Press. Trovessart, E. L., 1893.—Notes sue les les sarcoptides pilicoles (Listrophorinae). C. r. Séanc. Soc. Biol., (9)5 : 698-700. , 1917.—Troisiéme note sur les sarcoptides pilicoles et description de.genres- nouveaux. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr., 42 : 151—158. WAKEFIELD, N. A., and WARNEKE, R. M., 1967.—Some revision in Antechinus (Marsupialia)—2. Victorian Nat., 84 : 69-99. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vow. 101, Part 1 STUDIES IN THE ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN NEW SOUTH WALES. II. THE EFFECTS OF WATER SUPPLY AND PHOSPHORUS UPTAKE ON THE GROWTH OF BANKSIA SERRATIVOLIA, B. ASPLENIIFOLIA AND B. ERICIFOLIA M. Y. Srmpprqi* AND R. C. CAROLINT | Accepted for publication 17th December 1975] Synopsis An experimental study of Banksia serratifolia, B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia was carried out to evaluate the hypotheses and conclusions drawn from the field analysis results, as reported in Siddiqi eé al. (1972). In a soil (texture) and water interaction experiment, the growth of these species was shown to be related to moisture level. However, it 1s probable that the development of proteoid roots depends on a combination of moisture level and aeration of top soil. All the three species were shown to differ in their tolerance ranges to the various combinations of these factors. Absorption of P#2 by intact proteoid and non-proteoid roots and its subsequent translocation to shoots were investigated. In B. serratifolia and B. asplenifolia, proteoid roots were shown to absorb considerably more P* than the non-proteoid roots, whereas in B. ericifolia there was no significant difference between the two types of roots. INTRODUCTION Siddiqi et al. (1972) have employed quantitative methods to demonstrate that various heathland communities on the central coast of New South Wales can be classified in relation to large-scale differentiation of regional climate, the physical characteristics of associated soils and variations in modal water tables. Within this broad framework of regional variation, Siddiqi (1971) has employed conven- tional pattern analysis to demonstrate the existence of smaller-scale vegetation mosaics which can be classified by the relative distribution and abundance of ‘“‘ indicator ’’ shrub species such as Banksia serratifolia, B. asplentifolia and B. evicifolia. This latter work suggests that the relative distribution of these species in the ecotones between the units of these small-scale mosaics may be due in part to the outcome of competitive interactions between the species concerned. Because of the uncontrolled nature of the field situation, and the strong proba- bility that field experiments are likely to be confounded by the added complexity of fire, we have examined this hypothesis by way of laboratory experiments. This paper reports two experiments designed to investigate the comparative erowth responses of these three Banksias to variations in soil texture and water availability ; and to examine one possible role of proteoid roots as they may affect the interactions between these species. EXPERIMENT 1 EFFECTS OF SOIL TEXTURE AND WATER INTERACTION ON THE GROWTH OF B. SERRATIFOLIA, B. ASPLENIIFOLIA AND B. ERICIFOLIA This experiment was designed to investigate the effects of four soils of differing textures and four water regimes, combined factorially to give 16 treatments, on the growth of B. serratifolia, B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia. * School of Biological Sciences, University of Sydney, New South Wales, 2006. Present Address: Botany Department, University of Dar es Salaam, Dar es Salaam, Tanzania. 7 School of Biological Sciences, University of Sydney, New South Wales, 2006. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socretry or New Sours WALES, Vou. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. C. CAROLIN 39 Materials and Methods Sandy soil and clay soil were collected from a sub-surface profile at Moura- waring Moor, air dried, ground, and seived through a 2mm mesh. Apart from the sand and clay, two further synthetic soils were produced, containing 60 : 40 and 40: 60 proportions by volume of sandy and clayey soils respectively. Thus, in all, four soils were used in the experiment, each pot in the experiment being filled with 700 cc of the appropriate soil. The soils were analysed for a moisture factor (M.F.), exchangeable sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, available phosphorus and total nitrogen. RELATIVE DRY WT. OF SHOOT k, iS AG = wre Fig. 1. Banksia serratifolia: relative dry weight of shoots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. : Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios (F) from analyses of variance (anovar). [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, 8; each significant at p<0-001]. Watering interval (days) Soil composition l.s.d. F (% sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 100/0 0-616 1-433 1-872 1-906 0-429 20-86 (0-359) (0-620) 60/40 2-512 2-253 1-331 0-997 0-496 22-66 (0-808) (0-286) 40/60 2-810 1-483 1-204 0-601 0-263 133-42 (0-391) (0-184) 1-055 0-616 0-289 0-084 — — 0/100 (-0- 485) (-1-241) [1-026] [0-785] [0-538] [0-284] [0-098] 113-29* l.s.d. 0-559 — — 0-217 (0-157) (0-154) EF 39-35 127-517 305-157 133-59 * Square root transformation of data before anovar; means and l|.s.d. for square root values in square brackets. 7 Natural logarithm transformation of data before anovar; means and l.s.d. for loge values in rounded brackets. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 1 LO ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., I The four watering treatments used comprised daily watering, watering on alternate days, watering every two days,| and watering every four days (see 0, 1, 2, 4, on Watering Interval (Days) seale, respectively, in Figs 1-9). A constant amount of 200 ml of tap water was supplied to each pot—28-5% volume by volume for all soils. The pots were standard 5” diameter and were filled to within approx. 2-5 em below the top. They were arranged in randomised blocks and re-randomised at four-week intervals. The seeds were germinated on filter pads in the laboratory and two-week old seedlings matched for even size were transplanted one to each pot, then placed in a glasshouse Watering treatments were imposed after the first post- cotyledonary leaf had emerged. RELATIVE DRY WT. OF SHOOT Fig. 2. Banksia aspleniifolia : relative dry weight of shoots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios (F) from analyses of variance (anovar). [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, 8; ***, significant at p<0-001; n.s., not significant]. Watering interval (days) Soil composition l.s.d. F (% sand/% clay) 0 a 2 4 100/0 0-447 0-628 0-579 0-546 0-147 2-88 n.s. (—0- 620) 60/40 0-881 0-687 0-425 0-375 0-107 51-48 *** rh ; (—0-988 40/60 0-618 0-400 0-397 0-225 0-065 64-86*** (—1-506) 0/100 0-522 0-300 0-268 0-069 0-058 107-02*** (—2- 670) l.s.d. 0-120 0-094 0-024 = : (0-308) if 26-36*** ADS 2FEX 305-3 ** 89-45*** > aie 7 pare logarithm transformation of data before anovar; means and 1.s.d. for loge values im brackets. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New Soutu WAtzEs, Vot. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. C. CAROLIN 41 Results The plants were harvested 14 weeks after the start of the various watering treatments. Proteoid roots were separated from the main root system; these and other plant fractions were oven-dried at 80°C for 72 hours. The results are presented in Figs 1-9 on the following measures: (a) dry weight of shoot; (b) dry weight of roots (proteoid-+non-proteoid) ; (c) dry weight of proteoid roots. Significant variance heterogeneity, as detected by Bartlett’s test, precluded use of analysis of variance in the full table of data for each characteristic measured. However, in subsets of watering intervals within soils and species, or of soils RELATIVE DRY WT. OF SHOOT Fig. 3. Banksia ericifolia: relative dry weight of shoots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios (F) from analyses of variance (anovar). [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, 8; ***, significant at p<0-001; **, significant at p=0-01—0-001). Watering interval (days) Soi] composition l.s.d. F (% sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 100/0 0-809 0-608 0-435 0-319 0-112 . 38-87*** 60/40 0-577 0-570 0-508 0-324 0-079 23 86*** 40/60 0-577 0-391 0-325 0-193 0-104 25-18*** 0/100 0-526 0-258 0-095 0-041 — — (0-647) (-1- 456) (-2-366) (3-219) (0-612) 35-16***+ l.s.d. 0-140 0-154 0-043 0-059 EF 8: 70** 11-90** 190-08*** Do ENGEL* + Natural logarithm transformation of data before anovar ; means and l|.s.d. for loge values in brackets. within watering intervals and species, the data showed homogeneity of variance either in the untransformed or in log or square root transformed state, and were tested for significant effects in these two types of subset using where necessary a log or square root transformation. The significance of these comparisons is indicated in the legends to Figs 1-9. In order that a graphical comparison between the species may be made, the highest values obtained for any one of the three species for a given fraction PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY oF NEW SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 1 12 ECOLOGY OF COASTAT HEATH IN N.S.W., IL (shoot or total root) has been taken as unity and the remaining values calculated proportionately. These relative values are used as a basis for comparison in Rios 1-9. Discussion The results as shown in Figs 1-9 clearly show that B. serratifolia grows very well in sand and clay mixtures and to lesser extent in clay soil in monocultures under conditions of freely available moisture—soil enviroments in which this OF ROOTS RELATIVE DRY WT, Fig. 4. Banksia serratifolia: relative dry weight of roots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios (F) from analyses of variance. [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, 8; ***, significant at p<0-001; **, significant at p=0-01—0-001). Watering interval (days) Soil composition ls.d. F (% sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 100/0 0-292 0-585 0-636 0-662 0-190 8-64** 60/40 0-746 0-681 0-387 0-326 0-096 50-16*** 40/60 0-847 0-457 0-353 0-252 0-088 92-65*** 0/100 0-393 0-197 0-124 0-024 0-048 111-48*** l.s.d. 0-187 0-091 0-085 0-070 i POE By 2 BG Si/peaas G4 Sb eee hole sma Species does not normally occur naturally. Beadle (1962) has reported a similar growth behaviour for Acacia suaveolens, another frequent sand heath species, and suggest that its total absence from clayey soils in the field is due to its inability to compete with the more aggressive species of that habitat. Our results, In agreement with those of Beadle, suggest that the total elimination of B. serratifolia from clayey soils in the field may be determined primarily by an interspecific competition factor. I DARTH At es 7 = 1 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrery or NEw SoutH Wates, Vou. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. C. CAROLIN 43 It seems highly significant that B. serratifolia fails to develop proteoid roots in the sand and clay mixtures and clay soil (Fig. 8) even when the overall growth is maximum (Figs 1, 4). B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia, however, produce significant amounts of proteoid roots in these treatments (Figs 8, 9). Jeffrey (1967) has shown that in Banksia ornata and B. serrata the proteoid roots are much more active in the absorption of phosphorus than their non- proteoid counterparts and points out that these special roots may be very impor- tant in competition. Groves (1964) and Jeffrey (1967) have suggested that proteoid roots are produced in response to low phosphorus levels in the surrounding medium. In the present case, however, this does not seem to be so. The value of available phosphorus in sandy soil (7 ppm) is significantly higher than those of sand and clay mixtures (3-5 ppm) and pure clay soil (1 ppm). RELATIVE DRY WT. OF ROOTS Fig. 5. Banksia aspleniifolia: relative dry weight of roots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (1.s.d.) and variance ratios (F) from analyses of variance (anovar). [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, 8; each significant at p<0-001]. Watering interval (days) Soil composition —§ AAA AAAs... F (% sand/% clay) 0 i 2 4 100/0 0-161 0-456 0-464 0-485 0-097 26-83 (—0- 736) 60/40 0-409 0-325 0-161 0-149 0-053 60-24 (—1- 903) 40/60 0-375 0-263 0-165 0-105 0-044 76-85 (—2- 266) 0/100 0-164 0-144 0-104 0-026 0-036 29-95 (—3 - 647) l.s.d. 0-054 0-056 0-035 — (0-292) F 64-35 56-49 236-46 179-77} 7 Natural logarithm transformation of data before anovar; means and I.s.d. for loge values in brackets. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH WaAtgEs, Vout. 101, Part 1 4 ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., IL Alternatively, two hypotheses are available for consideration : (1) That the higher levels of exchangeable sodium, potassium and magnesium and total nitrogen in sand and clay mixtures and pure clay are responsible for the absence of proteoid roots in B. serratifolia ; (2) That the poor aeration of sand and clay mixtures and pure clayey soil is mainly responsible for the failure of B. serratifolia to develop proteiod roots. Lamont (1972) provides data for Hakea prostata showing that although at lower nitrogen levels proteoid root production increases with increasing nitrogen, above a certain level of nitrogen it decreases. Unfortunately, Lamont’s values are not comparable with those in the present paper since they are given in milli- moles per litre of solution applied. Whilst accepting the possibility that nutrient levels can influence proteoid root production of the Banksia species discussed here, the aeration factor may be more important since even in pure sandy soil, both in the glasshouse and field, the proteoid roots are developed almost entirely in the top 15 cm of soil, the layer with maximum aeration. This is further substantiated by an observation 1:0 OF ROOTS RELATIVE DRY WT, Fig. 6. Banksia ericifolia: relative dry weight of roots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios C F ) Jai analyses of variance (anovar). [Variance ratios (F) each with degrees of freedom 3, significant at p<0-001; **, significant at p=—0-01-0-001; *. significant at p=0-05-0-01). Watering interval (days) Soil composition ls.d. F (% sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 100/0 0-425 0-417 0-316 0-268 0-105 5-74* 60/40 0-300 0-323 0-312 0-181 0-062 12-10** 40/60 0-308 0-250 0-235 0-151 0-044 22-49*** 0/100 0-214 0-212 0-055 0-026 = = (-1-546) (-1-617) (-2- 903) (-3- 672) (0-503) 44-97***+ ls.d. 0-082 0-123 0-042 0-026 F 12-04** Do Tle 89-78*** 155-23*** + Natural logarithm transformation of data before anovar ; means and l.s.d. for loge values in brackets. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. CG. CAROLIN 45 in the glasshouse, where, in some trial pots which were not sealed below, the roots projected through the bottom holes and produced proteoid roots outside. Jeffrey (1967) has also mentioned a similar observation. Moreover, the levels of nutrients in sand and clay mixtures are similar to those of vegetated sandy soil where this species occurs naturally and produces proteoid roots very profusely (Siddiqi, 1971). It seems reasonable, then, to suggest that in sand and clay mixtures and in pure clay, poor aeration may be responsible for the failure of B. serratifolia to develop proteoid roots under adequate moisture conditions. Under conditions of improved aeration in these soils, moisture becomes the limiting factor and the soils become too hard to penetrate, especially by the young rootless and proteoid roots. Flocker et al. (1959) and Pearson (1966) similarly suggest that in moist compact soils it is the poor aeration which hampers root growth, since, as the soil becomes dry and aeration improves, the mechanical conditions in soil become limiting to root growth. 1:0 7p) 5 ps 2 =a x2 a9 = Ld ° => G =w 0 Ea Nid < 0° 2 a) Lay 3) Fig. 7. Banksia serratifolia: relative dry weight of proteoid roots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. ya) Means lof dry weight (g) in 100% sand with least significant difference at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratio (F) from analysis of variance with degrees of freedom 3, 8, significant at p<0-001. No proteoid roots were formed in other soils. Watering interval (days) l.s.d. F 0 1 2 + 0-010 0-382 0-427 0-279 0-070 75-364 A reduction in the amount of proteoid roots in pure sandy soil under the driest treatment in B. serratifolia (Fig. 7) may be attributed to water deficiency, to the possible increase in temperatures of the top layer due to moisture deficiency, or to a combination of both. Under the moisture conditions applied, B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia both produce proteoid roots in sand and clay mixtures and in clay but proportionately less than in sand. While a similar effect of soil and water interaction is shown in sand and clay mixtures and in clay in both these species, B. ericifolia in sandy soil produces maximum weight of proteoid roots in the wettest treatment, whereas B. aspleniifolia shows maximum development in the three drier treatments PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety or NEw SourH WaAtss, Vou. 101, Part 1 Lo HCOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., II (Fies 8, 9). This implies that the development of proteoid roots in these species is controlled by a combination of moisture level and optimum aeration of the top soil. In addition it seems that all three species differ in their tolerance ranges and in the level of optimal combination of these factors. That B. aspleniifolia is absent from deep sandy ridges in high rainfall regions, dominated by B. serratifolia, indicates a possible competition factor in its distribution (Siddiqi, 1971) since it is shown above that Banksia aspleniifolia srows well without competition in well-watered sand. Our results also indicate the probable importance of proteoid roots in any interaction of species, for there is a reduction in the amount of proteoid roots in B. serratifolia, with no corres- ponding decrease in the case of B. aspleniifolia, in the driest sand treatment. In this treatment the amount of proteoid roots per plant tends to be equal in the two species, whereas in the intermediate treatment the proportional OF PROTEOID ROOTS RELATIVE DRY WT, Fig. 8. Banksia aspleniifolia : relative dry weight of proteoid roots of seedlings in a range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 (l.s.d.) and variance ratios i es significant at p=0-01-0-001; ***, significant at p<0-001] from analyses of variance anovar). Watering interval (days) Soil composition ls.d (% sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 a i: 100/0 0-017 0-267 0-251 0-271 a be (-4-120) (-1:324) = (-1-382) = (-1-318) (0-322) 198-45***41 60/40 0-159 0-127 0-050 0-032 aon oe (3-446) 40/60 0-123 0-070 0-028 0-007 0-018 85-42**#1 | (4-924) 0/100 0-020 0-009 0 0 0-004 41-78% Ls.d. 0-019 0-027 0-014 ia ‘ (0-317) E 156-13***1 181-09***1 934-33***3 399. 76***+3 a + 2 abun logarithm transformation of data before anovar; means and l.s.d. for loge values in brackets. 1 F values with degrees of freedom 3, 8. ; Anovar only includes daily and alternate day watering, F value with degrees of freedom 1, 4. Anovar only includes the first three types of soil, F values with degrees of freedom 2, 6. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF New SourH WatgEs, Vou. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. C. CAROLIN 74 amount produced by B. serratifolia is higher than that of B. aspleniifolia. To- wards the wettest treatment the amount again tends to be equal. This agrees with direct field observations: B. serratifolia and B. asplentifolia occur in mixed stands at the two extremes, that is in very wet situations (e.g. towards the gully at Mourawaring Point and at Myall Lakes) and in relatively dry situations (e.g. Agnes Banks); B. aspleniifolia is eliminated from the intermediate situation (Siddiqi, 1971). Wesuggest then, that B. serratifolia outcompetes B. aspleniifolia at the sites where it produces a maximum amount of proteoid roots, whereas these species grow together in a mixed stand at the two extremes of water ayail- ability in sand heath due to the amounts of proteoid roots produced being similar in both the species. The results clearly show that, although proteoid roots may be extremely important in determining competitive ability, there is no relationship between the amount of proteoid roots produced and overall performance of the plants. RELATIVE DRY WT. OF PROTEOID ROOTS “Ars Fig. 9. Banksia errcifolia: relative dry weight of proteoid roots of seedlings in @ range of soils of varying texture and watering regimes. : Means of dry weight (g) with least significant differences at p=0-05 and variance ratios (F) [***, significant at p<0-001; n.s., not significant] from analyses of variance (anovar). Watering interval (days) Soil composition l.s.d. F (%sand/% clay) 0 1 2 4 100/0 0-269 0-248 0-165 0-093 0-059 20-22***1 (-1-324) (-2-401) 60/40 0-167 0-146 0-100 0-029 0-020 98-75***1 (—1- 792) (—3- 556) 40/60 0-094 0-073 0-050 0-020 0-011 88-58***1 (—2-370) (—3- 899) 0/100 0-029 0-019 0 0 0-014 4-20n.s.? (—3- 549) l.s.d. — 0-038 0-015 — (0-237) (0-340) FE 175-03***F1 79-1 3***1 167: 04***3 63: 86***+8 { Natural logarithm transformation of data before anovar; means and l.s.d. for loge values brackets. 1F values with degrees of freedom 3, 8. * Anovar only includes daily and alternate day watering, F value with degrees of freedom 1, 4. 3 Anovar only includes the first three types of soil, F values with degrees of freedom 2, 6. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTY oF NEw SoutH WAtES, Vou. 101, Part 1 LS ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., II Both B. serratifolia and B. aspleniifolia show a better performance in terms of total dry weight in sand and clay mixtures under adequate moisture conditions. Beadle (1962) has obtained similar results for Acacia suaveolens, which, however, is different in that it forms root nodules which may complicate the issue. It seems that the increased growth in soils of higher clay content may be primarily associated with their generally higher nutrient status (see Table 1). TABLE 1 Analysis data of soils used in Experiment no. 1 Exchangeable Soil M.F. - Available P Total N composition (%) Na K Ca Mg (ppm) (%) by volume (Metson, 1956) (m—equiv. %) (Fogg and (Piper, 1950) (Tucker, 1960) Wilkinson, 1958) 100% S:0%C 0-07 0:41 O-11 0:75 0:25 7 0-020 60% S:40%C 0-64 0-50 0-13 0-76 0-76 5 0-045 40% S$: 60%C 1-01 0:76 0:29 0:76 1:26 3 0-053 0% S:100%C 2-04 0-83 0:36 0-51 2-04 1 0-104 S=sandy soil from Mourawaring site. C=clay soil. EXPERIMENT 2 ABSORPTION OF P*? BY PROTEOID ROOTS AND NON-PROTEOID ROOTS AND ITS TRANSPORT TO LEAVES IN A 24-HOUR UPTAKE PERIOD IN BANKSIA SERRATIFOLIA, B. ASPLENITFOLIA AND B. ERICIFOLIA Engler (1889) was probably the first to realise the importance of proteoid roots in the absorption of nutrients as is evident in his reference to these structures as “ absorption hairs’. Subsequently there has been general agreement about the function of proteoid roots in the absorption of nutrients, particularly phos- phorus (Purnell, 1960; Groves, 1964; Jeffrey, 1967). Jeffrey (1967) has demonstrated that the excised proteoid roots of Banksia ornata and B. serrata absorb significantly more phosphorus than their non-proteoid counterparts. The results from Experiment 1 indicated that proteoid roots are important in determining the competitive abilities of the three Banksia species used and that these species differ in their overall tolerance ranges. The results also served to indicate the levels of certain environmental factors affecting the relative yield of proteoid roots in them. The second experiment was set up to investigate the absorption of phosphorus into intact proteoid and non-proteoid roots and its subsequent translocation to the aerial parts of the plant. Materials and Methods ' Seedlings of Banksia serratifolia, B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia were raised. in sand in the glasshouse under conditions suitable for the development of proteoid roots. The seedlings were removed from sand after 24 weeks growth, when all plants were showing well developed proteoid roots. The roots were thoroughly washed free of sand with tap water and then washed twice with distilled water for 30-minute and 10-minute periods respectively. The plants of each species were divided into two sets and treated thus : Set 1. All root systems left intact. Non-proteoid roots from this set are designated NPR 1 and proteoid roots PR 1. Set 2. Proteoid roots removed. Non-proteoid roots from this set are designated NPR 2. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sours Wates, Vor. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI AND R. C. CAROLIN AQ The plants of both sets were then placed in 1/10 Hoagland solution minus phosphorus for one hour and subsequently transferred to 6” diameter sealed pots (1-5 litre capacity) containing 1/10 Hoagland solution with 1 ppm phosphorus as orthophosphate. These solutions were then labelled with 7-5 we P* prior to a 24-hour uptake period during which the solutions were aerated continuously. Uptake was terminated by transferring the plants to distilled water. The roots were washed with distilled water four times (10 minutes each). The experimental procedure adopted here was essentially that employed by Jeffrey (1967). Shoots, proteoid roots and non-proteoid roots were separated and oven- dried at 80°C. The dried samples were digested in a mixture of sulphuric acid, perchloric acid and nitric acid (Piper, 1950) and total P*? determined by liquid scintillation counting. TABLE 2 Absorption of P®? by proteoid roots (PR) and non-proteoid roots (NPR) and its subsequent translocation in 24-hour uptake periods in Banksia species NPR 1 Shoots Species Shoots,setp1 PR1 NPR1 NPR2 PRI PR1+NPR1 PRI+NPR1 (dpm/mg) (dpm/mg) (dpm/mg) (dpm/mg) (%) (%) B. aspleniifolia 10-6 1864-0 825-5 1069-0 44-28 2689-5 0-394 B. serratifolia 3-9 843-2 494-5 417-2 58-65 1337-7 0-292 B. ericifolia 124-3 1223-5 1315-2 1395-5 107-50 2538-7 4-896 _ TABLE 3 Comparison of the means in Table 2 t P Banksia serratifolia PR 1/NPR1 7-96 0:02-0:01 PR 1/NPR 2 8-23 0-02-0-01 NPR 1/NPR 2 n.s. Banksia aspleniifolia PR 1/NPR1 10-37 <0-01 PR 1/NPR 2 7:68 0-02-0-01 . NPR 1/NPR 2 9-05 0-02-0-01 Banksia ericifolia PR1/NPR1 n.s. . PR 1/NPR 2 N.S. NPR 1/NPR 2 nS. n.s.=not significant Results The results, from two replicates, expressed as mean disintergrations per minute (dpm) per mg dry weight of the respective plant fraction, are presented in Table 2. Table 3 shows the results of comparing the means in Table 2. It can readily be seen that the removal of proteoid roots has little effect on absorption by non-proteoid roots. Total root absorption is assessed by adding PR 1 and NPR1 and the translocation by the relative percentage of dpm/mg in shoot material to that in total roots. The relative efficiency in P** absorption of PR and NPR is indicated by the ratio of NPR1: PR1 %. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New Soutu Wats, Vou. 101, Part 1 50 ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., IL Discussion It is interesting to note that the differential behaviour of proteoid roots and non-proteoid roots in the absorption of P*? places the species into two distinct groups : (1) B. serratifolia and B. aspleniifolia group, with the proteoid roots showing substantially higher absorption than the non-proteoid roots. (2) B. ericifolia group, with no appreciable difference in the absorption of P*? by the two types of roots. The relevance of this distinction becomes apparent when their distribution in the field is considered. It is evident that B. ericifolia would be equally effective in exploiting the soil for nutrients, especially phosphorus, in an environment which is untavourable for the development of proteoid roots, e.g. most clayey soils, and at the same time deficient in available phosphorus, as is the case in the usual habitat of this species. Jeffrey (1967) has shown in B. ornata that although proteoid roots are more efficient in the absorption of phosphorus, both types of roots are capable of polyphosphate synthesis. He suggests that the increased uptake by proteoid roots is due to their greater surface/volume (dry weight) ratio. It may well be that the surface/volume ratio of non-proteoid roots in B. ericifolia has been improved (possibly by the presence of persistent hairs). It has been demonstrated in Experiment 1 that, whereas proteoid roots may be extremely important in determing competitive power, these structures bear little relationship to the performance of plants. Williams and Barber (1961) have argued that if a structure is more developed than would be appro- priate for the function it is said to perform, a second hypothesis is needed to explain the excess of structures over function. x PR M. Y. SIDDIQI, RK. C. CAROLIN AND P. J. MYERSCOUGH 61 values shows that one year after the fire the nutrient status was very similar to that before the fire, except for magnesium in Grids II and IV which was higher (1-04 m-equiv.%) after the fire than before (0-48—0-50 m-equiy.%). DISCUSSION The results clearly show that the total regrowth was highest at the sandy site (Grid II), while in the ground-water heath (Grids I, III and V) total regrowth was related to soil depth, being less as the loamy horizon becomes shallower. The small amount of regrowth in Grid IV, especially in the initial stages, may be related to the presence of a tall storey of Banksia ericifolia, Hakea teretifolia and Casuarina distyla before the fire and reflects the suppression of heliophilic species which sprout from underground stocks, e.g. Hypolaena fastigiata, Lepido- sperma spp. Such species show a rapid regrowth at other sites immediately after fire. This further suggests that, whereas these species have regenerated from underground stocks at other sites initially, in Grid IV they may have regenerated mostly from seedlings. The larger lignotuberous species, Banksia serratifolia and B. aspleniifolia, were much suppressed and few aerial shoots were present before the fire in Grid IV. These species showed a rapid regrowth immediately after the fire. Jacobs (1955) has reported that in tallowwood (Bucalyptus microcorys) a lignotuber was capable of producing a healthy shoot after being suppressed for 14 years on a forest floor under heavy shade. The most notable feature following the fire was the almost total absence of seedlings of the tall shrubby species Banksia ericifolia, Hakea teretifolia and Casuarina distyla from sites where their seedlings were present before the fire. This suggests that the present structure of vegetation would persist for a long time in the absence of a tall storey of these species. It also suggests that in the event of frequent periodic burning, these large shrubby species, which regen- erate solely from seedlings, would be eliminated and consequently the dominant stratum would then be formed by such shrub species as are able to regenerate from underground stocks, e.g. Banksia aspleniifolia. It is reasonable therefore to postulate that the community dominated by B. aspleniifolia at Mourawaring Point is a fire-maintained one in the wet sand heath and the ground-water heath. An observation on the North Head of Port Jackson, New South Wales, supports this. The area, with a loamy topsoil, contains numerous seedlings of Banksia aspleniifolia but no mature bushes. On the other hand, numerous dead sticks of B. ericifolia, Casuarina distyla (?) and Hakea teretifolia can be seen in the area but none of their seedlings. According to local residents, the area was subjected to periodic burning (approximately every two years) over the preceding few years. It seems that this area, once supporting a tall, dense scrub of these shrubs, has been transformed into an open heath where the most prominent species is B. asplenifolia, whose seedlings have established successfully in the absence of a tall storey. It is also interesting to note that the seedlings of B. aspleniifolia (and also of B. serratifolia) have been encountered only rarely at Mourawaring Point. There is no obvious explanation available to account for this difference in the behaviour of B. asplentifolia with respect to establishment of seedlings at these sites. Evans (1960) reports that most of the species growing on Hawkesbury Sandstone favour only one method of re-establishment, either by seedlings or by sprouting from underground stocks, and that Banksia aspleniifolia is one of the few species which regenerate by both sprouting and seedling production. It may be seen from the results that few changes have occurred in the floristic composition of herbaceous or undershrubby lower stratum at the open sites (Grids I, IJ, III and V) as compared to the site which supported a dense, tall storey before the fire (Grid IV). Many species which were frequent at the adjacent sites were absent, rare or suppressed in Grid IV before the fire. These PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WAtEs, Vot. 101, Part 1 62 ECOLOGY OF COASTAL HEATH IN N.S.W., III species appear and show a luxuriant growth after the fire at this site. Inter- estingly enough, a few species which were relatively rare at the adjacent sites before the fire show luxuriant growth in Grid IV after the fire, e.g. Acacia suaveolens, Lepidosperma limicola. Sweeney (1956) has shown a similar phenomenon for some herbaceous species on chaparral burns in California and has demonstrated that viable seeds of many herbaceous plants, appearing on one year old burns, were present in soil under brush stands of various ages. Two hypotheses have been put forward to explain any subsequent changes, following a fire, in population densities of herbaceous and undershrub species : (1) Direct factor-function relationship between fire and seeds (see Sweeney, 1956) ; (2) Competition (see Specht et al., 1958). Both the hypotheses are feasible and demonstration of the probability of either of these may not necessarily mean the elimination of the other. In fact, it seems likely that either one of them, or both, may contribute towards change in population densities of different species, depending on the vegetation types. More detailed studies are necessary to resolve this problem. In the present case, herbaceous or undershrub species regenerate after fire from underground stocks or seedlings or both. Any subsequent changes in population densities may be attributed either to a requirement of seeds for a temperature treatment before they germinate or to a competition factor, especially for light, which increases with time, or to both. In any event, periodic burning seems essential for continued survival of some of these species. The soil analysis shows that the nutrient status of soil returns fairly quickly to the pre-fire level (see Table 4). Specht et al. (1958), who have examined 23, 9, 15 and 25 year old stands of heath vegetation on Makin sand, point out that any increase in the nutrient status immediately after fire, which must occur, is essentially depleted by the end of 25 years. The nutrient status, then, remains relatively constant in the top 76cm of soil for the next 15 years. The soils under a 25 year old stand again show an increase in the nutrient status, which has been attributed to the degeneration of the two co-dominants, Phyllota and Casuarina. The results from this present study are in complete agreement with those of Specht et al. (1958) and furthermore indicate that the equilibrium may be reached within 12 months after fire. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The work decribed above formed part of the Ph.D. thesis submitted by one of us (M.Y.S.) during tenure of a University of Sydney Postgraduate Research Studentship. Support from University of Sydney Research Grant funds is gratefully acknowledged. References AnpeERSON, D. J., 1960.—A comparison of some upland plant communities with particular refer- ence to their structure. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Wales. Brave, N. C. W., 1940.—Soil temperatures during forest fires and their effect on the survival of vegetation. J. Hcol., 28: 180-192. , and Buress, A., 1949.—Working capital in plant community. Aust. J. Sci., 11: 207—208. ————,, Evans, O. D., and Carotiy, R. C., 1972.—Flora of the Sydney Region. Sydney: A. H. Reed. CoaLpRakE, J. E., 1961.—The ecosystem of the coastal lowlands (‘‘ Wallum”’) of Southern Queensland. C.S.J.R.O. Bull., 283. Evans, G. P., 1960.—Kcological studies on regeneration following bush-fires in the Hawkesbury Sandstone district. M.Sc. Thesis, University of Sydney. Harton, A. B., 1955.—The influence of plant litter on the Jarrah forest soils of the Dwellingup region, Western Australia. Commonw. For. Timber Bur. Leafl., 70. Jacoss, M. R., 1955.—Growth habit of the eucalypts. [Department of the Interior, Forestry and Timber Bureau] Canberra : Government Printer. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SourH Wags, Vot. 101, Part 1 M. Y. SIDDIQI, R. C. CAROLIN AND P. J. MYERSCOUGH 63 JARRET, P. H., and Perriz, A. H. K., 1929.—The vegetation of Blacks’ Spur region: A study in the ecology of some Australian mountain Eucalyptus forests. II. Pyric succession. -/. Hcol., 17 : 249-280. KersHaw, K. A., 1973.—Quantitative and dynamic plant ecology. 2nd ed. London: Edward Arnold. SHaw, N. H., 1957.—Bunch spear grass dominance in burnt pastures in South-Hastern Queensland. Aust. J. Agric. Res., 8: 325-334. Srpprer, M. Y., Caroxnin, R. C. and ANDERSON, D. J., 1972.—Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. I. Vegetation structure. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 97: 211-224. Specat, R. L., 1969a.—A comparison of the sclerophyllous vegetation characteristic of Mediter- ranean type climates in France, California, and Southern Australia. I. Structure, morphology, and succession. Aust. J. Bot., 17: 277-292. , 1969b.—A comparison of the sclerophyllous vegetation characteristic of Mediterranean type climates in France, California, and Southern Australia. II. Dry matter, energy, and nutrient accumulation. Aust. J. Bot., 17: 293-308. , Rayson, P., and Jackman, M., 1958.—Dark Island heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). VI. Pyric succession : changes in composition, coverage, dry weight and mineral nutrient status. Auwst. J. Bot., 6: 59-88. SWEENEY, J. R., 1956—Responses of vegetation to fire: A study of the herbaceous vegetation following chaparral fires. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot., 28: 143-250. Toruity, J. C., 1969.—Soil temperatures and seed burial in relation to the performance of Het- eropogon contortus and Themeda australis in burnt native woodland pastures in Hastern Queensland. Aust. J. Bot., 17: 269-275. , and SHaw, N. H., 1968.—Temperatures under fires in bunch spear grass pastures of South-East Queensland. J. Aust. Inst. Agric. Sci., 34: 94-98. AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO. LTD., 71-79 ARUNDEL ST., GLEBE, N.S.W., 2037 1976 Copies of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES (with the exception of a few volumes and Parts) may be purchased from the Society, Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000. Current charges for the PROCEEDINGS are : Volumes—$16.00 each for 1st Series (Volumes 1-10); $11.00 each for 2nd Series (Volumes 11-20) and all subsequent volumes. Parts—$5.00 each for all back parts; $4.00 each for current Parts. For volumes of 5 or 6 Parts, $1.00 each for first and last Parts. Prices do not include postage. Subscription to the PROCEEDINGS—$20.00 per volume, plus $2.50 postage— $22.50. All prices are in Australian currency. These charges may be revised from time to time, and inquiries should be addressed to The Secretary, Linnean Society of New South Wales, Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000, Australia. The Society’s PROCEEDINGS are printed and published for the Society by the Australasian Medical Publishing Co., Ltd., 71-79 Arundel Street, Glebe, N.S.W., 2037. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES ISSN : 0047-4746. Coden : PLSW-A Proceedings, Volume 101, Part 1, 1976 CONTENTS Annual General Meeting : Report on the Affairs of the Society for the Year Balance Sheets BARKAS, J. P. Harly Devonian igneous activity and some SirotierepiNe correlations in the Tumut region, New South Wales 3 : Fatn, A., and Domrow, R. The genera Campylochirus Trouessart and Campylochiropsis Fain (Acari: saunas parasites of phalangeroid marsupials in Australasia .. oe =e oh Sipp1qi, M. Y., and CAaRoLin, R. C. Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. II. The effects of water supply en phosphorus uptake on the growth of Banksia ate a aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia 60 : 5 a Srppiqi, M. Y., CAROLIN, R. C., and MYERSCOUGH, P. J. Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. III. Regrowth of vegetation after fire a ae ac Page 13 27 38 53 Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales Issued 16th March, 1977 VOLUME 101 PART 2 No. 446 The Linnean Society of New South Wales Founded 1874. Incorporated 1884 “ For the cultivation and study of the science of Natural History in all its branches ” OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1976-77 President Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. Vice-Presidents H. G. Cogger, M.Sc., Ph.D. ; D. W. Edwards, B.Sc.Agr. ; P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D. ; T. G. Vallance, B.Se., Ph.D. Honorary Treasurer Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Sc., F.L.8. Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. H. G. Cogger, M.Se., Ph.D. D. W. Edwards, B.Sc.Agr. L. A. S. Johnson, D.Se. D. McAlpine, M.Sc., Ph.D. Helene A. Martin, Ph.D. Lynette A. Moffat, B.Se., Ph.D. P. Myerscough, M.A., D. Phil. J. Pickard, B.Sc. Agr. A. Ritchie, B.Se., Ph.D. Secretary Ruth J. Inall Council F. W. E. Rowe, B.Sc., Ph.D., M.I.Biol., E.L.S. P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D. N. G. Stephenson, M.Sce., Ph.D. T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Sc., F.L.S. J. T. Waterhouse, B.Sc., M.Sc. (N.S.W.), M.Se. (R’ding), F.L.S. B. D. Webby, M.Sc., Ph.D. A.J. T. Wright, B.Se., Ph.D. Auditors W. Sinclair and Company, Chartered Accountants Iinnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology, University of Sydney K. Y. Cho, Ph.D. TAbrarian Constance B. McKay, B.A., A.L.A.A. Executive Editor Janet Donald, B.A., Dip.Lib. The Society’s Headquarters are in Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000, Australia THE ROLE OF BARLEY, RYE AND GRASSES.-IN_THE 1973-74 WHEAT STEM RUST EPIPHYTOTIC IN SOUTHERN AND EASTERN AUSTRALIA N. H. teres AND I. A. WaATSON* [Accepted for publication 18th February 1976] Synopsis The addition of three further genotypes, namely Agropyron intermedium derivative, Entrelargo de Montijo and Barleta Benvenuto, to the Australian wheat stem rust differential set permitted the recognition of 41 strains among 1,530 isolates identified during the 1973-74 wheat season. A comparison is made for each State and region of the stem rust patterns obtained from collections on wheat and those from barley, rye and the grasses Agropyron scabrum and Hordeum leporinum. The latter patterns reflect to a high degree the relative frequencies of strains well established in the different areas. Population shifts in the pathogen are mainly attributed to factors other than survival ability on grasses. Putative hybrid rusts, probably involving Puccinia graminis avenae, are also described. INTRODUCTION Annual surveys aimed at determining the variability of cereal rusts in Australia have been conducted for more than 50 years and the main emphasis has been placed on the wheat stem rust pathogen, Puccinia graminis Pers. f.sp. tritici Kriks. and EK. Henn. During the last 35 years collections from wheat have comprised two different types, namely those taken from commercial cultivars giving susceptible or semi-resistant reactions to all strains and those coming from cultivars with genes for resistance to certain strains only. On account of the fact that the second group of cultivars placed severe restrictions on the development of some strains having fewer genes for virulence, the tables concerned with relative frequencies are thus biased. However, such bias is not always caused by collections from wheats in the second group. If it was, the strain pattern obtained only from cultures established from the generally susceptible wheats could be used to give a true picture of the composition of the pathogen population during a particular year. Recently, in Western Australia and South Australia, more than half of the total wheat acreages in each State were sown to one cultivar, Gamenya (Sr9b) and Halberd (Sr6 Sri1), respectively. These cultivars have genes for resistance which differentiate between strains in those areas and consequently both were important in determining the nature of the rust population in these States. The 1973 growing season differed in many aspects from previous ones. Stem rust was prevalent throughout the whole of the southern and eastern wheat belts and many samples from wheat were submitted for identification. Also, collections from barley, rye and numerous grasses were made by our, co-operators, as well as by one of us (I.A.W.) during routine survey sampling. The present study exploits this unique opportunity to compare the rust patterns emerging from sampling these different hosts. An attempt is also made to relate the shifts in the P. g. tritici population to infection of grasses (possible oversummering), windblown rust movements and cultivars carrying major genes for resistance. * Plant Breeding Institute, University of Sydney, New South Wales, 2006. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 2 penn ee eT 66 BARLEY, RYE AND GRASSES—WHEAT STEM RUST EPIPHYTOTIC MATERIALS AND MmTHops As previously reported (Watson and Luig, 1963) our survey procedure is to take field collections of rusted wheat and to inoculate the susceptible cultivar Sonora W195 with them. The inoculum so increased is then used to infect seedlings of wheat genotypes belonging to four groups. The first group com- prises those genotypes of the standard international differential set useful for the Australia-New Zealand geographical region, namely Marquis (Sr7b), Reliance (Sr5), Mindum, Acme, Einkorn (Sr2/) and Vernal Emmer (Sr9e). The genes in parentheses are important for differentiation. The reactions of these six genotypes determine the standard race number and a further subdivision is made on the basis of the system proposed by Watson and Luig (1963) using eleven supplementary genotypes constituting the second group. ‘The first eight of these and the infection types observed on them have already been described (Watson and Luig, 1963, 1966; Luig and Watson, 1970). In 1973 we added W3592, Entrelargo de Montijo W3560 P.1.184525 (a Portuguese 7. durum. cultivar) and Barleta Benvenuto W3502 C.1.14196 (an Argentine cultivar which possesses a major gene (infection type ‘‘ X—”’ to Australian strains)). W3592 is an alien substitution line in which the 7D chromosomes are replaced by a pair of chromosomes from SSE {\ \))) =) Zip ye Z bg WOE (G22 Fig. 10. oenic bergensis. FE. Rissikia media. G. T A. Phoenicopsis elongatus. B—-D. Sphenobaiera argentinae. HK. S. storm- ssikva lia. G. Taeniopteris carruthersti. A. Complete unusually long eaf and normal width leaf UNEF14650; B. UNEF14642; C. UNEF14644; D. UNEF- 14646 ; E. Showing strongly developed woody interveinal striae UNEF 14648 ; F. Foliar spur UNEF14683 ; G. Natural group UNEF14670. All from UNEL1564. All natural size. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETy or New SoutuH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 2 G. RETALLACK ET AL. 105 Basin (Frenguelli, 1948), the Cortaderita Formation of the Barreal-Hilario Basin (Frenguelli, 1948), the Los Rastros Formation in the Ischigualasto- Villa Union Basin (Stipanicic and Bonetti, 1969) and the Challao-San Isidro Basin (Frenguelli, 1948). Douglas (1969) believes that supposed remains of P. elongatus from the Early Cretaceous of Victoria (Medwell, 1954, pl. 3, figs 9, 10) are equisetalean fragments. Comparable Basin Creek Formation material. UNEF13465 (Flint and Gould, 1975, pl. 2, fig. 6) from UNEL1495 and UNEF13326 from UNEL1489. Genus SPHENOBAIERA Florin 1936 Sphenobaiera argentinae (Kurtz) Frenguelli 1946 Figs 10B-10D Description. Several specimens from UNEL1564 vary from narrow scarcely- divided leaves (Fig. 10B) to more widely divided (Fig. 10C) and broader fan- Shaped leaves (Fig. 10D). They have a narrow almost petiolate leaf base. The veins dichotomise at various levels. Commonly there are clear interveinal woody striae. Comparison. These leaves differ from Phoenicopsis elongatus in their divided apex and veins dichotomising at various levels in the leaf. Sphenobaiera argentinae is larger and more deeply divided than is usual for Ginkgoidium (Seward, 1919; Frenguelli, 1946). The variation in shape (Figs 10B, 10C, 10D), the interveinai striae and close relationship with associated Phoenicopsis elongatus are most similar to the South American material (Frenguelli, 1946). Occurrence. This species is best known from the Potrerillos and Cacheuta Form- ations of the Cacheuta Basin in Argentina (Frenguelli, 1946 ; Jain and Delevoryas, 1967). Archangelsky (1968a) and Anderson and Anderson (1970) also record it from Paso Flores, the Cortaderita Formation in the Barreal-Hilario Basin and in the Chihuiu-Tronquimalal Basin in Argentina. It may also occur in the Feldspathic Sandstone Series at Lords Hill, Hobart, Tasmania (as Salisburia hobartensis in Johnston, 1887, 1888). Comparable Basin Creek Formation material. UNEF14610, UNEF14611 and Australian Museum specimen number AMF48873 all from UNEL1489. Sphenobaiera stormbergensis (Seward) Frenguelli 1948 Fig. 10K *1903 Baiera stormbergensis ; Seward, p. 64, pl. 8, fig. 3. pl917b Ginkgo magnifolia ; Walkom, p. 9, pl. 4, figs 3, 4. p1927 Ginkoites magnifolius ; Du Toit, p. 25, fig. 17, pls 10, 11, fig. 1. 1928 Ginkgoites cf. magnifolius ; Walkom, p. 466, pl. 27, fig. 3. 1936 Ginkgoites magnifolius ; Florin, p. 44. 1947 Ginkgoites magnifolius ; Jones and De Jersey, p. 59, pl. 10, figs 2, 3. 1948 Sphenobaiera, Stormbergensis ; Frenguelli, p. 247. 1968a Sphenobaiera stormbergensis ; Archangelsky, p. 82. 1969 Sphenobaiera stormbergensis ; Stipanicic and Bonetti, pp. 1095, 1099. 1975 Ginkgoites cf. magnifolius ; Flint and Gould, p. 71. Holotype. The specimen figured by Seward (1903, pl. 8, fig. 3) from the middle Molteno Beds (Stage D) of Konings Kroon, Elliot, South Africa (Du Toit, 1927, Daal): Description, Only one specimen (Fig. 10E) was found at UNEL1564. This is a broad leaf in which the venation is obscured by woody striae giving the leaf a pleated appearance. Comparison. The strong pleating of the leaf is most similar to the specimen figured by Du Toit (1927, pl. 30). Sphenobaiera argentinae is smaller, narrower, only once divided and never shows a comparable development of woody inter- veinal striae. Sphenobaiera stormbergensis has been synonymised with “* Ginkgo PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WatgEs, Vou. 101, Part 2 106 MIDDLE TRIASSIC MEGAFOSSIL FLORA Huttoni magnifolia”’ of Ward (1905) from the Jurassic of Oregon and Alaska. The American Jurassic species is distinctly smaller, usually only divided into four segments and the lowest segments form a right angle to a long well- diferentiated petiole (Ward, 1905, pl. 32, fig. 2). Remarks. The three species Phoenicopsis elongatus, Sphenobaiera argentinae and S. stormbergensis form an intergrading series of increasing size, dissection and development of woody interveinal striae. They may have been one species in life. Occurrence. This species is known from the upper Beaufort Beds (Stage B) and the middle Molteno Beds (Stage D of Du Toit, 1927, and cycle 2 of Anderson, 1974) in South Africa, the Esk Trough and Ipswich Coal Measures in Queensland (Walkom, 1917b, 1928 ; Jones and De Jersey, 1947), the Red Cliff Coal Measures in New South Wales (Flint and Gould, 1975) and the Cortaderita Formation of the Barreal-Hilario Basin in Argentina (Stipanicic and Bonetti, 1969 ; Archangelsky, 1968a). Comparable Basin Creek Formation material. Robust pleated leaves UNEF13333 from UNEL1489 and UNEF13471 from UNEL1495. DIVISION CONIFEROPHYTA ORDER CONIFERALES Family PODOCARPACEAE Genus RISSIKIA Townrow 1967) Rissikia media (Tenison Woods) Townrow 1967) Figs 10F; 11A Description. ) brand) WG, "5-6 no sm ohn O lemme) malts lee oem 14-15, and S82, 5-6, on interscutal membrane. Venter. Similar to that of female deutonymph, but differs in absence of one pair of posteroventral setae. Preanal pores 14-15 apart. Chelicera. Resembling those of female deutonymph, but only 32-33 long. Legs. Chaetotaxy resembling that of female deutonymph. Nine macrosetae : on genu I, 30-33; on basitarsus I, 35-39; on genu II, 33-35; on genu III, 57-59 ; on tibia III, 45-50; on genu IV, 106-109; on tibia IV, 34-90; on basitarsus IV, 78-80. Phyoseius fotheringhamiae Denmark and Schicha, 19746 Figs 40-60 LARVA (Figs 41-46) Dorsum. Smooth idiosoma 168-177 long, 123-138 wide at L4. Ten pairs of setae, four dorsal, one median, four prolateral, one caudolateral: D1, 9-11 long; D2, D3, D4 and M1 minute; Li, 14-17; 2, 6-7; L3, 4-6; L4, 58-60; L9, 72-83. L4 and L9 slightly knobbed, L4 serrated. 1 approximately as. long as distance between its base and base of L2. All other setae shorter than distances between their bases and bases of setae following next in series. No stigmata or peritremes. Venter. Sternal area with three pairs of setae. Anal shield with three subequal para-anal setae. Two pairs of preanal, lateroventral, and posteroventral setae.. Sexes indistinguishable. Chelicera. Both digits 11-12 long, no teeth on margins or pilus dentilis. Legs. With same chaetotaxy as that of 7. (7.) helenae larva. PROTONYMPH (Figs 47-53) Dorsum. Rugose idiosoma 202-205 long, 130-133 wide at Sl. Fourteen pairs. of setae, five dorsal, two median, one sacral, six lateral : D1, 20-22 long ; D2, D3, and D4, 4-6; D5, missing; D6, 6-7; M1, 4-6; M2, 40-45; S1, 29-30; S2, missing; Li, 33-34; L2, 14-15; L3, missing; L4, 18-19; L5, 51-52; L6, 37-38; L7, 32-34. U1, L5, L6, L7, D1, M2, S1 serrated, all other setae smooth. Ll longer than distance between its base and base of L2. 3 as long as, all other setae shorter than, distances between their bases and bases of setae following next in series. One pair of pores as figured. Peritremes 29-30 long. Venter. Sternal area with three pairs of setae. Anal shield with three para- anal setae. Two pairs of preanal, one of lateroventral, and one of caudal setae. Five pairs of small pores as figured. Sexes indistinguishable. Chelicera. Fixed digit 14-15 long, with two teeth on distal half, one tooth on proximal half and pilus dentilis. Movable digit 16-17 long, with one tooth,. on inner margin. Legs. Chaetotaxy of first three legs resembles that of larva. Chaetotaxy of leg IV like that of 7. (T.) helenae protonymph, but with four knobbed macrosetae ;. on genu, 18 long; on tibia, 29; two on basitarsus, 29-30 and 22 long. DEUTONYMPH (Figs 54-60) Female Dorsum. Rugose idiosoma 245-248 long, 144-147 wide at S1, with 15 pairs of setae,. five dorsal, two median, one sacral, seven lateral : D1, 27-31 long; D2, 4-5; D3, 5 ;. D4, 5-6 ; Dd, missing; D6, 4-5 ; M1, 6-7; M2, 43-45; S1, 32-41; S2 missing ;, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTy or NEw SoutH WatgEs, Vot. 101, Part 3 EB. SCHICHA 159 Lil, 43-47; L2, 14-17; L3, 19-22; L4, 11-14; L5, 59-68; L6, 52-58; L7, 39-46. All lateral setae (except L2), Dl and S1 serrated. All other setae smooth. 1 to L4 longer, all other setae shorter, than distances between their bases and bases of setae following next in series. Two pairs of pores as figured. Peritremes 116-117 long. Venter. Sternal area with five pairs of setae. Anal shield with three para-ana] setae of equal length. Two pairs of preanal setae, two pairs of lateroventral Figs 47-53. Phytoseius ‘fotheringhamiae protonymph. 47. Dorsal shield. 48. Venter. 49. Chelicera. 50. Leg I dorsal. 51. Leg II dorsal. 52. Leg III dorsal. 53. Leg IV dorsal. setae, one pair of posteroventral setae, and one pair of large caudal setae. Ten pairs of pores as figured. Chelicera. Digits 22-23 long. Fixed digit with two teeth on distal half, one tooth on proximal half and pilus dentilis; movable digit with one tooth on inner margin. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 3 160 IMMATURE STAGES OF THREE PHYTOSEIID MITES Legs. Chaetotaxy resembles that of 7. (Z.) helenae deutonymph, but with four knobbed macrosetae: on leg IV: on genu, 18-21; on tibia, 32-40; two on basitarsus, 32-40 and 22-23 long. Male Dorsum. Kugose idiosoma 214-225 long, 100-121 wide at S1; chaetotaxy resembles that of female deutonymph, but setae shorter: D1, 24-26; D2, Figs 54-60. Phytoseius fotheringhamiae deutonymph. 54. Dorsal shield. 55. Venter. 56. Chelicera. 57. Leg I dorsal. 58. Leg ID dorsal. 59. Leg III dorsal. 60. Leg IV dorsal. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Wates, Vot. 101, Part 3 BE. SCHICHA 161 D3, D4, 4-5; D5 missing; D6, 7-8; M1, 5-6; M2, 36-42; S1, 35-37; S82, missing ; Li, 32-38; L2, 7-8; L3, 14-16; L4, 9-11; L5, 50-57; L6, 44-49 ; L7, 37-39. Venter. Similar to female deutonymph, but differs in absence of one pair of lateroventral and one pair of posteroventral setae. Chelicera. Resembling those of female deutonymph, but only 20-21 long. Legs. Chaetotaxy resembling that of female deutonymph. Four knobbed macrosetae on leg IV: on genu, 16-17; on tibia 28-29; two on basitarsus, 25-30 and 18-21 long. DEPOSITORY OF SPECIMENS One slide specimen of larva, protonymph, male deutonymph and female deutonymph of each species at the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, S.A. Additional slide specimens at Biological and Chemical Research Institute, Rydalmere, N.S.W. References Cant, D. A., 1958.—Immature and adult stages of some British Phytoseiidae Berl., 1916 (Acarina). J. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.), 43 : 599-643. Denmark, H. A., and Scuicua, H., 1974a.—A new species of Amblyseius Berlese (Acarina : Phytoseiidae) from apple in Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 99 : 145-150. , and —————, 1974b.—A new species of Phytosezus Ribaga (Acarma : Phytoseidae) from apple in Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 99 : 177-180. Evans, G. O., 1963.—Observations on the chaetotaxy of the legs in the free-living Gamasina (Acari: Mesostigmata). Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Zool.), 10 : 275-303. ScuicHa, E., and Dossz, G., 1974.—A new species of Typhlodromus Scheuten (Acarina 3 Phytoseiidae) from apple in Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 99 : 79-84. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrery or New Sout Watzs, Vot. 101, Part 3 A NEW SPECIES OF BRACHIONUS (ROTIFERA) FROM THE MYALL LAKES, NEW SOUTH WALES Minoru SuDZUKI* AND B. V. TimmMst [Accepted for publication 19th May 1976] Synopsis Brachionus baylyi sp. nov. from the Myall Lakes, New South Wales, is described and figured. — It is most closely related to B. plicatilis and its varieties, differing in the form of both frontal and caudal margins. INTRODUCTION During an investigation on the plankton of the Myall Lakes (Timms, 1976) an undescribed species of Brachionus was recovered from Myall Lake and Lake Boolambayte. The Myall Lakes are a series of interconnected coastal lakes 80 km north of Newcastle. Myall Lake, and to a large degree Lake Boolambayte, are unusual thalassic lakes in that their salinities are low and fairly constant (1-4%,) (W. Johnson, pers. comm.). Most pankters inhabiting them are ubiquitous forms at the freshwater end of salinity gradients in eastern Australia (Timms, 1976), but one of the rotifers is new. This species is described below. Brachionus baylyi sp. nov. Description. Lorica stippled on surface, triangular with rounded corners in dorsal view (Fig. 1), oval in lateral view (Fig. 2) and semi-circular shaped in frontal view (Fig. 3). Occipital spines six in number, of which anterior medians longest. Each spine comparatively long and broad-based, without so-called saw teeth (Fig. 4). In some specimens there are occasional accessory spines (Fig. 5) on the intermediate spines. Pectoral or mental margin clearly divided into four nearly equal sized projections, each triangular in shape and acutely pointed (Fig. 6). Caudal extremities nearly M-shaped (Fig. 7) in dorsal view, upsidedown heart-shaped (Fig. 8) in ventral view. A knoblike swelling (Fig. 9) usually on the right outer side, rarely on both sides of the caudal extremity. No posterior spines present. Foot calyciflorus-like in type (Fig. 10). Measurements. FEMALE. Length of lorica: 268-330 u, widest part 245-290 u, highest part 140-159 yu. Occipital spines: laterals 26-36, intermediates 27-39 u, medians 32-44. Caudal projections: 9-13 long, 9-12 wide. Foot: 160-170 uw long, 25-30 u in diameter. MALE. c. 150 yu long, 60 high. Foot: ¢ 30u long, 11 u in diameter. AmicTiIC EGG. 120-140 » long, 105-120 p in diameter. MALE EGG. ¢. 80u long, 70-73 in diameter. Fertilised egg not observed. Form change. Variation has been observed in the degree of roundness of the corners of the lorica—from slightly rounded to markedly rounded ; in the presence or absence of both accessory spines on the inter- mediates ; in the swelling on the caudal extremity. Ecology. In Myall Lake the 99 and g@ female of B. baylyi were abundant on 23 February 1974 and occurred with Asplanchna (Asplanchnella) sp. near A. brighiwelli, Russelletia parrotti Russell? (92), Monostyla robusta Stokes? and M. stenroost Meissner. On 16 April 1974 the 92 female was uncommon and a single Specimen of the male of B. baylyi was found together with Asplanchna * Biology Laboratory, Nihon Daigaku, Omiya-shi, Saitama-ken, Japan 330. ft Science Department, Avondale College, Cooranbong, New South Wales, 2265. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 3 MINORU SUDZUKI AND B. Y. TIMMS 163 (Asplanchnella) sp. near A. brightwelli (32,22). In Boolambayte B. baylyi was uncommon and most of the specimens did not carry eggs. The new species B. baylyi occurred in salinities 1-4-1-9°40 and only in late summer and autumn. It was invariably associated with the copepods Gladioferens spinosus Henry and Sulcanus conflictus Nicholls. ie : Se ae a Figs 1-5. Brachionus baylyi sp. nov. 1. Dorsal view. 2. Lateral view. 3. Frontal view 4. Occipital spines. 5. Accessory spines on intermediates. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaAtss, Vout. 101, Part 3 164 A NEW SPECIES OF BRACHIONUS (ROTIFERA) The holotype of Brachionus baylyi is deposited in the Australian Museum, Sydney (AM Z.3697); other specimens have been designated as paratypes (AM Z.3698). Further paratypes are kept in the Biological Laboratory of Nihon Daigaku (A.ROT. 0012-0015). Etymology. The species has been named after Dr. I. A. E. Bayly, Monash University, in honour of his pioneering work on the biology of estuarine plankton in Australia. Figs 6-10. Brachionus baylyi sp. nov. 6. Pectoral margin. 7. Caudal extremity (dorsal). 8. Caudal extremity (ventral). 9. Knoblike swellings. 10. Foot with toes. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 3 MINORU SUDZUKI AND B. VY. TIMMS 165 DISCUSSION Brachionus is a common and representative genus of planktonic rotifers. A number of monographs and papers relating to it have been published, including descriptions of the genus and its species (Bryce, 1924; Ahlstrom, 1940; Gillard, 1948 ; Voigt, 1956-57 ; Bartos, 1959 ; Berzins, 1960; Rudescu, 1960; Sudzuki, 1964; Kutikova, 1970; Ruttner-Kolisko, 1972; Koste, 1972). The following five criteria for species separation within the genus Brachionus have been regarded as valid by Bryce (1924, p. 95), Sudzuki (1964, p. 40) and Ruttner-Kolisko (1972, p. 163) : (i) the pattern of the pectoral or mental margin of the lorica ; (ii) the pattern of the occipital margin ; (iii) the general shape of the lorica (spine excluded) ; (iv) the structures of the foot ; (v) the features around the foot opening. Based on the pattern of the pectoral margin of the lorica, the specimens from Myall Lakes are most similar to two varieties of B. plicatilis, namely var. orientalis Rodewald 1937 (Rudescu, 1960, p. 408, Fig. 323) and var. decemcornis Fadeev 1925 (Kutikova, 1970 p. 568, Fig. 926) and to B. satanicus Rousselet 1913 (Rousselet, 1913. pp. 59-60, Fig. 2). However, these two varieties of B. plicatilis are clearly different from B. baylyi in the pattern of the occipital margin (saw-toothed in these varieties, not saw-toothed in B. baylyi) and in the general shape of the lorica (ovoid in B. orientalis, elongated in B. decemcornis, triangular in B. baylyi). Brachionus baylyi is distinctly different from B. satanicus in lacking large caudal elongations. The pattern of the occipital margin and the caudal features are similar in Brachionis baylyi and B. nilsoni Ahlstrom (Ahlstrom 1940, Pl. 18, Fig. 2), but in the latter species the pectoral margin is undifferentiated into projections. In the general shape of the lorica and in habitats B. baylyz is allied to two varieties of B. plicatilis, namely var. spatiosus Rousselet 1912 (Rousselet, 1912 pp. 373-4, Pl. 13, Fig. 2) and var. rotundiformis Tschugnoff 1921 (Kutikova, 1970, p. 586, Fig. 927), to B. pterodinoides Rousselet 1913 (Rousselet, 1913, p. 59, Fig. 1; Carlin-Nilson 1935, p. 4, Figs 8-10) and to B. novae-zealandiae (Morris) 1913 (Morris, 1913, p. 167 with figure). However, B. baylyt is different from these two varieties in lacking saw teeth on the occipital spines and in not possessing ‘‘ scalloped ’? elevations on the pectoral margin. Furthermore the Shape of the posterior half of the lorica is different (round in var. rotundiformis, slender in var. spatiosus). Brachionus baylyi is readily distinguishable from B. pterodinoides in the position of the foot opening (ventral and nearly in the middle of the body in B. pterodinoides, terminal in B. baylyi), and from B. novae- zealandiae in the shape of the pectoral margin (markedly elevated toward centre in B. novae-zealandiae, not elevated toward centre in B. bayly1). ACKNOWLEDGEMENT We wish to thank Dr. M. Geddes, Zoology Department, University of Adelaide, for his valuable comments on the manuscript. References AHLSTROM, E., 1940.—A revision of Rotatorian genera Brachionus and Platyias with description of one new species and two new varieties. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 77: 143-184. Barros, E., 1959.—Virnici. Fauna Cesk. SSR, 15 : 1-965. Berzxs, B., 1960.—Rotatoria. Cons. Int. Hxplor. Mer, 86: 1-3. Bryce, D. L., 1924.—The Rotifera and Gastrotricha of Devil’s and Stump Lakes, North Dakota, U.S.A. J. Quekett Microsc. Club, ser. 2, 15 : 81-108. CartiIn—Nitson, B., 1935.—Rotatorien aus Mexico. K. Fysiogr. Saellsk. Lund Foerh., 5: 1-11. GILLARD, A., 1948.—De Brachionidae van Belgie. Naturwiss. Tijdschr., 30 : 159-218. Kostz, W., 1972.—Rotatorien aus Gewadssern Amazoniens. Amazoniana, 3: 268-505. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watss, Vor. 101, Part 3 166 A NEW SPECIES OF BRACHIONUS (ROTIFERA) Kourrixova, L. A., 1970.—Kolovrati. Fauna SSSK, n.s., 104 : 1-774. Morris, C. B., 1913.—Some notes on Rotifera not previously recorded as occurring in New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst. Wellington, 46 : 163-167. Rovusseter, ©. F., 1912.—On Notholca iriarthroides Skorikow, Cathypna brachydactyla Stenroos and on a new Brachionus from Devil’s Lake, North Dakota. J. Quekett Microsc. Club, ser. 2, 11: 371-374. , 1913.—The Rotifera of Devil’s Lake, with a description of a new Brachionus. J. Quekett Microsc. Club, ser. 2, 12 : 55-64. Rupescu, L., Ropewatp, 1960.—Rotatoria. Jn Fauna Republicii Populare Romine. Vol 1. Bucharest : Academia Republiciui Socialiste Romania : 1-1192. RurrnEeR—KoutisxKo, A., 1972.—Rotatoria. Binnengewaesser, 26 : 99-234. Supzuxt1, M., 1964.—New systematical approach to the Japanese planktonic Rotatoria. Hydro- biologia, 23 : 1-124. , 1968.—Rotifers from Western Australia. Proc. Jap. Soc. Syst. Zool., 3: 17-19. , 1975.—A new Brachionus from Australia and a revision of the B. plicatilis complex. Zool. Mag., 84: 446. Toams, B. V., 1976.—Salinity regime and zooplankton of the Myall Lakes. Hunter Nat. Hist., 8: 6-13. Voret, M., 1956-57.—Rotatoria. Die Rddertiere Mitteleuropas. Bd 1 und Bd 2. Berlin— Nikolassee : Borntrager. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New Sout Wates, Vout. 101, Part 3 UPPER ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS FROM CENTRAL-WESTERN NEW SOUTH WALES B. D. WEBBY* (Plates II-X) [Accepted for publication 19th May 1976] Synopsis Eighteen tabulate coral species are described and illustrated from the Upper Ordovician limestones and limestone breccias of central New South Wales. Included among the forms are four new species of Bajgolia : B. caespitosa, B. furcata, B. minor and B.? grandis, the latter only doubtfully assigned to the genus, and five other new species, Hofletcheria hadra, Aulopora walliensis, Adaverina acritos, Fletcheria? stipulosa and Catenipora clausa. An outline of the stratigraphic distribution of the faunas is also presented. INTRODUCTION Earlier contributions on the Upper Ordovician tabulate corals of central New South Wales are given by Etheridge (1909), Hill (1957), Webby and Semeniuk (1969, 1971) and Webby (1975). The present work completes descriptions of the following six tabulate coral groups—lyoporids, cryptoli- chenariids, auloporids, aulocystids, fletcheriids and halysitids. These are based on collections (both unsilicified and silicified) housed in the Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney. The faunas have been collected from widely scattered localities on the flanks of the Molong Rise and on the Parkes Platform (Webby, 1976), through a considerable part of the Late Ordovician (from late Gisbornian or early Eastonian to early Bolindian). Distinctive faunas are readily distinguishable at each of the four stratigraphic levels (Faunas I-IV of Webby, 1969, 1972, 1975), and at the lowest stratigraphical level (Fauna I) there are important lateral faunal variations arising from the differing tectono-environmental settings on either side of the Molong Rise. As representative of Fauna I on the eastern flank of the Molong Rise is the assemblage from the lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone of Hofletcheria hadra sp. nov., Bajgolia caespitosa sp. nov., B. furcata, sp. nov., B. cf. contigua (Hill, 1955) and B. minor sp. nov., and the occurrence of B. ef. furcata from a similar stratigraphic level in the Reedy Creek Limestone. A somewhat different fauna characterises Fauna I on the western side of the Molong Rise. Not only are all the species of Tetradiwm different (see Webby and Semeniuk, 1971), but other tabulates as well—for example, Fletcheria? stipulosa sp. nov. in the Gerybong Limestone Member (Semeniuk, 1973) and Bajgolia cf. gracilis (Hill, 1957) in the Manooka Limestone Member of the Daylesford Limestone (Bowan Park Group). The massive, middle member of the Cliefden Caves Limestone was originally excluded from the faunal scheme because it contained few key fossils. The finding of certain diagnostic forms in the massive limestone has, however, led to the bulk of this sequence being assigned to Fauna II. I. G. Percival recently : collected Bajgolia? grandis sp. nov., and the stromatoporoid EHeclimadictyon from a level (‘‘ E-horizon’’) 94m above the base of the massive member in the Licking Hole Creek area. This extends the range of the Fauna II assemblage * Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney, New South Wales, 2006. _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 3 168 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. downwards from its previous base just below the ‘“‘ Awlopora”’ unit, at the inferred break in sequence (see Webby and Semeniuk, 1971, text-fig. 2) to well within the lower half of the massive, middle part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone. The “ Aulopora’’ unit contains B.? grandis and B.? sp., and the overlying ‘‘ Tsland ” unit exhibits B. gracilis (Hill, 1957) and encrusting forms Awulopora walliensis sp. noy., A. sp.B and sp.C. The Fauna II elements of the Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group) include B. gracilis and A. walliensis. Forms doubtfully referred to B. furcata also occur in the Quondong Limestone and upper part of the Regan’s Creek Limestone. Another species of Aulopora, A. sp.A occurs in the limestone of the lower part of the Goonumbla Voleanics north of Gunningbland. It is a member_ of the Fauna III assemblage. ; In a limestone breccia towards the base of the Malongulli Formation, overlying the Cliefden Caves Limestone, I. G. Percival found a distinctive species of Catenipora, C. sp., at a level normally included in Fauna III (Webby, 1969, 1975). The Malongulli species, though derived, must be similar to or older than the enclosing sediments (Zone of Dicranograptus hians—late Eastonian) and must represent the earliest appearance of Catenipora in the New South Wales succession. The appearance of Catenipora is therefore not diagnostic of Fauna IV as previously stated (Webby, 1972). However, the species Catenipora clausa sp. nov., C. cf. obliqua (Fischer- Benzon, 1871) and Adaverina aeritos sp. nov., occurring in the limestone band and breccias at the top of the Malachi’s Hill Beds (Semeniuk, 1970), represent characteristic components of Fauna IV. Possibly coming from a similar horizon is the occurrence of Halysites sp. from the Angullong Tuff of Rodds Creek (Smith, 1966). SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS Superfamily LIGHENARIIDEA Family LYOPORIDAE Kiaer 1930 Genus EOFLETCHERIA Bassler 1950 Type species. Columnaria incerta Billings 1859. Diagnosis. Phaceloid to locally cerioid colony of cylindrical, thick-walled corallites. Short, thick septal trabeculae in wall; sometimes project as short spines into lumen. Transverse wrinkles may occur in outer corallite wall. Lateral increase frequent. Tabulae irregularly spaced, usually complete, horizontal or sagging. No pores and no connecting processes. Discussion. Although originally described by Bassler (1950, p. 266) as lacking septal structures, later workers (Hill, 1953, 1955; Sokolov, 1962; Klaamann, 1966) have widened the scope of the genus to include species with septal trabeculae. Hill and Stumm (1956), on the other hand, have since stated in their diagnosis of Hofletcheria that there are no septa and that the corallites are connected by “ short, horizontal syringoporoid tubules’. The type species, E. incerta from the Chazyan of Mingan Islands, Montreal and Ottawa, as descibed by Okulitch (1937) and Sinclair (1961) has, however, no connecting processes or tubules between individual corallites. Lambe’s (1899) interpretation of septal spines in the type species has not been substantiated by later workers, but other species of Hofletcheria, notably EH. orvikui (Sokolov, 1951), exhibit Such structures. The species assigned to the genus are listed by Klaamann (1966). To this list should be added one Australian species, HE. hadra sp. nov., described herein. Sokolov (1955, 1962) and Klaamann (1965, 1966) have assigned Hofletcheria and Keuschia Kiaer 1930 to the Family Lyoporidae Kiaer 1930 (Subfamily PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTy or New South Watzs, VOL. 101, Part 3 B. D. WEBBY 169 Eofletcherinae Sokolov 1955), whereas Hill (1953), despite emphasising resem- blances in the character of the transverse wrinklings of corallite wall of Hofletcheria, Reuschia and cerioid Lyopora, preferred to relate the first two genera to syringoporids and auloporids—Subfamily Syringoporinae of the Family Auloporidae (Hill and Stumm, 1956). Hofletcheria hadra sp. nov. Bl Ve fies Ib. Pl Via, tio. 4. Material. Holotype SUP 78185 and paratypes SUP 78223, 78184 from the ‘““ mixed fauna ’’ unit west of Boonderoo shearing shed. Other paratypes from the ‘‘ mixed fauna ”’ unit comprise SUP 78218 from east of Fossil Hill and SUP 78180 from south-west of Fossil Hill. A fifth paratype (SUP 78163) comes from the “‘ lower coral’ unit at Fossil Hill. All types are from the lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone. Description. Corallum of moderately closely spaced corallites ranging from fasciculate to cerioid in habit (not ramose) ; one colony (Pl. V, fig. 5) encrusts Tetradium cribriforme (Etheridge). Adult corallites usually range from 2-1 to 33mm in diameter, but colonies exhibiting a predominantly cerioid form tend to have smaller corallites, usually from 1-7 to 2-5 mm in diameter. In transverse sections, corallites show rounded to polygonal and alveolitoid outlines ; wall of variable thickness, usually from 0-3 to 0-7 mm, but in extremes, especi- ally in cerioid forms, up to 0-9 mm thick, and almost entirely fills interior of corallite. Dark median line is exhibited where corallites are in contact. Wall to either side of dark line composed of radially aligned fibrous, possibly trabecular, tissue. A few rare examples mainly where a thinner wall is represented show spine-like projections of trabeculae into lumen (Pl. V, fig. 3), but usually inner margin of wall is smooth. In parts of corallum conspicuous transverse wrinkles develop in outer corallite walls (Pl. V, fig. 1; Pl. VI, fig. 4); only rarely does entire wall become folded causing an overall widening of the lumen (Pl. V, fig. 1). Calices may be very deep (PI. VI, fig. 4). Rejuvenescence is suggested by occasional rapid constrictions in diameter of an individual corallite. Increase is apparently of lateral type. Tabulae typically flat or sagging; rarely updomed ; display extreme variability of vertical spacing, from closely spaced intervals (eight in 3 mm) in some corallites to apparent absence from others. Remarks. The specimen described by Hill (1955) as Lyopora cf. favosa (McCoy) from the Gordon Limestone at Oceana Mine, Zeehan, Tasmania, may belong to this species or be closely related. Both the type species HE. incerta and H. subparallela Hill 1953 from the Mjosa Limestone of Norway, like H. hadra, exhibit transverse wrinkling. However, H. incerta has much smaller corallite diameters and thinner walls, and H. subparallela has more wide spaced corallites with a more variable diameter. Family CRYPTOLICHENARIIDAE Sokolov, 7 Sokolov and Mironova, 1959 Genus BAJGOLIA Dziubo 1962 Type species. Bajgolia altaica Dziubo 1962. Diagnosis. Ramose colony with cylindrical to slightly compressed branches. Corallites with polygonal shapes axially, curving up and outward as rounded and thickened tubes to open obliquely at the surface of the branch; usually with moderately wide interspaces between individual calices. Wall of radially aligned fibrous (trabecular ?) tissue ; presence of septal trabeculae not proven. Unequal, adaxial, bipartite parricidal increase. Tabulae rare or absent ; PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY oF NEw SoutH WALEs, Vot. 101, Part 3 170 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. irregularly spaced and usually complete; horizontal, sagging or updomed forms. No pores or connecting processes. Discussion. The type species of Bajgolia, B. altaica Dziubo 1962, from the late Ordovician of the Altai Mountains, south-west Siberia, is based only on the holotype. Dziubo’s original diagnosis states that tabulae are absent. The New South Wales representatives, in contrast, usually exhibit rare tabulae, although not every specimen of a particular species shows them. It seems likely that Dziubo’s failure to observe tabulae in the type species is a reflection of inadequate sampling or study, and that there is no fundamental difference between the apparently non-tabulated type species from Siberia and the tabulated Australian forms. The Australian species formerly assigned by Hill (1955, 1957) to the genus Eofletcheria, by having a ramose colony form and by exhibiting unequal, adaxial, bipartite increase, are now included in the genus Bajgolia. 'They differ funda- mentally in growth form and mode of increase from the type species and other North American and Eurasian species of LHofletcheria. The genus Bajgolia seems to have a restricted distribution to the late Ordovician of south-west Siberia, New South Wales and Tasmania. Bajgolia is placed by Dziubo (1962, 1965) and by the present writer in the Family Cryptolichenariidae because it exhibits a similar pattern of adaxial, bipartite increase to other representatives of the family, notably Cryptolichenaria Sokolov 1955, Amsassia Sokolov and Mironova 1959 and Porkunites Klaamann 1966. However the first two of these genera show massive, cerioid coralla, unlike the ramose form of Bajgolia, while Porkunites has a much more open fasciculate habit. Sokolov and Mironova (1959), Sokolov (1962) and Klaamann (1966) allied the genera Oryptolichenaria, Amsassia and Porkunites to the tetradiids because of the type of axial increase. However, there is a fundamental difference between the tetradiids which exhibit quadripartite increase and those genera of the Family Cryptolichenariidae which show bipartite increase. Representatives of this family, while showing features which are essentially intermediate between Iichenaria and Tetradiwm, seem more satisfactorily grouped with Lichenaria. The markedly different growth form and type of preservation of Bajgolia do not ally it at all closely to Tetradiwm. Alternatively, based on morphological similarities, but not on the mode of increase, Bajgolia may be aligned with auloporids. Bajgolia caespitosa sp. nov. Pl. Il, figs 1-7 Material. Holotype (SUP 78179) from the “ mixed fauna” unit east of Fossil Hill; three paratypes (SUP 78181, 78183, 78186) from the ‘“‘ mixed fauna ”’ unit west of the Boonderoo shearing shed, and a fourth (SUP 78191) from the ‘‘ lower coral” unit at Licking Hole Creek. The ‘lower coral’ and ‘‘ mixed fauna ”’ units are in the lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone. Description. Ramose corallum composed of branches of variable thickness usually from 5 to 8mm across. Corallites of axis of branch usually polygonal, often seen in process of bipartite division. Corallites curve upwards and outwards away from axial region, opening obliquely to surface; may exhibit free outer ends. Corallites in distal parts of branch usually cylindrical and from 1-4 to 1-7 (although in extremes up to 2:0) mm in diameter. Wall thickness varies from 0-1 to 0-7 (on average from 0-25 to 0:40) mm; thickening in rare instances almost entirely fills lumen ; towards distal extremities there is a marked thinning of wall. Sclerenchyme with fibrosity aligned at right angles to median dark PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SourH WALEs, VoL. 101, Part 3 B. D. WEBBY 171 line; also associated concentric fracture pattern, probably of secondary origin. Division is unequal, adaxial, bipartite and parricidal. New wall commences to grow from small protuberances of sclerenchyme either on one side or both sides of lumen (PI. II, figs 6-7 ; Text-fig. 1A-D); protuberances extend inwards as septa-like structures to fuse axially and so subdivide the lumen into unequal divisions. Dark median line establishes in new dividing wall between two ‘* daughters ”? but does not initially extend to join dark line surrounding former ‘‘ mother ”’ corallite (Text-fig. 1C). This is because with a moderately deep calice the intervening sclerenchyme had already been formed by ‘“ mother ”’ polyp immediately prior to division. With further growth, dark line dividing ‘“¢ daughters ’’ extends outwards to fuse with that surrounding former ‘‘ mother ”’ corallite (Text-fig. 1D). No evidence of dimorhpism or corallite offsets (Oliver, 1966). Rare flat to sagging tabulae. Text-fig. 1. Series of diagrammatic transverse sections showing nature of unequal, adaxial increase in Bajgolia (based on B. caespitosa ; approximately x11). A. Initial inward extension of sclerenchyme from one side of lumen only ; sometimes this single protrusion extends right across lumen and is not met halfway by matching plate-like “ septa ” from opposite side. B-—D. Stages in the development and fusion of the “ septal ” structures extending from both sides of the lumen to form a new dividing wall with two adjacent new “ daughter ”’ corallites. Remarks. One very large ramose colony (SUP 78190) in the collections of the Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney, bears close morphological similarities to B. caespitosa. However, unfortunately the specimen has lost its attached locality and horizon data. It seems likely from manner of preservation and appearance to have been collected from the lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone, but this cannot be established with certainty. The colony has an overall flattened hemispherical form, with a flattened top surface and a weakly cone-shaped bottom ; it has dimensions of 480 by 440 mm across and 140mm in height. Branches radiate outwards and upwards from a centre placed slightly eccentrically at the bottom of the cone. The branches reach a vertical height of 140mm directly above the centre of growth, but extend outwards a much greater distance, in some instances for some 300 mm from the original growth centre. Corallite dimensions are very similar to those of B. caespitosa. However, the colony has on average much thinner corallite walls (Pl. II, fig. 8). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 3 172 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. Bajgolia furcata sp. nov. Py he 9 er IN ees: Alia — Material. Holotype (SUP 78155) and paratypes (SUP 78151-54, 78156, 78159-60, 78175) from the ‘‘ lower coral” unit at Fossil Hill; lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone. Description. Moderately sized corallum with discrete branches from 3 to 12 (usually from 4 to 7)mm in diameter; sometimes seen to be branching off a reptant base of attachment (Pl. IV, fig. 1) or otherwise intergrown with bryozoans. Corallites rounded to polygonal; in peripheral part of branch mainly cylindrical and at distal ends may be free ; range from 1-0 to 1-8 (usually _ from 1:2 to 1-5)mm in diameter. Towards axial part of branch corallites tend to be more typically polygonal and include on average smaller dimensions, to a minimum of 0-4mm in diameter; some of these smaller corallites occur in areas of active division. Wall of individual corallites mainly from 0-1 to 0-2 mm in thickness ; in extremes may be up to 0:4 mm thick. In transmitted light common wall is composed of a narrow median dark zone from 0-01 to 0:02 mm wide and thick, light-coloured sclerenchyme to either side. Median dark zone frequently appears to consist of two dark lines separated by a narrow grey zone between. Sclerenchyme adjacent to dark zone shows a radial fibrosity but towards inner margin of wall microstructure is obscured by concentric fracture pattern, probably of secondary origin. Division is of an unequal adaxial, bipartite, parricidal type, as in B. caespitosa sp. nov. Tabulae, though rarely seen, are of sagging or slightly updomed types. Remarks. Bajgolia furcata bears resemblances to B. caespitosa, but differs in having somewhat smaller corallite dimensions and a lesser thickness of corallite wall. A silicified specimen (SUP 26281) from the Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group) at Quondong bears close similarities to the species and perhaps should be assigned to it. The branch fragment of the colony is from 3-5 to 6mm across, and the corallites have a diameter of from 1-3 to 1-5 mm. - The corallites open obliquely at widely spaced intervals along the outer surface of the branch as in B. gracilis (Hill, 1957). Another silicified specimen from the upper part of the Regan’s Creek Limestone (unit 3 of McLean, 1974) displays a thicker branch (up to 9mm across) and has a much more closely packed arrangement of corallites (Pl. III, fig. 12). In some parts of the corallum the corallites debouch at right angles to the branch axis. Corallites are mainly from 1:3 to 1:5mm wide, and wall is from 0-2 to 0:4 mm thick. This form is only doubtfully assigned to the species. Two unsilicified specimens (SUP 78220-21) of Bajgolia from the lower part of the Reedy Creek Limestone just north of Molong may also be allied to B. furcata. They are not well preserved but exhibit a slightly different growth form with less discrete bundles or branches and a greater ieee NONE of free, upwardly directed corallites (Pl. VI, fig. 3). Bajgolia furcata, though resembling B. contigua (Hill, 1955) from the Gordon Limestone of the Oceana Mine, Zeehan, Tasmania, and the type species, B. altaica Dziubo 1962, from the late Ordovician of south-west Siberia, differs in having on average larger corallite dimensions. It may also be distinguished from B. altaica, which has no tabulae. Bajgolia ct. contigua (Hill 1955) Pl. IV, figs 2-3 Material. Two specimens (SUP 78176-77 ) from the upper part of the “ lower coral”? unit at Fossil Hill. and one specimen (SUP 78192) from the ‘“ lower coral” unit at Licking Hole Creek ; lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF NEw SourH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 3 ee eo B. D. WEBBY GS Description. Corallum ramose, with branches from 2 to 8mm in diameter ; occasionally intergrown with bryozoans (Pl. IV, fig. 3). Corallites. cylindrical in outer parts of individual branches, usually from 0-8 to 1-2 mm in diameter. Inner part of branch has prismatic-shaped corallites, usually of smaller dimen- sions and frequently undergoing unequal adaxial, bipartite division. Wall thickness varies from 0:07 to 0-15 mm, although in extremes up to 0-25 mm thick. Poor differentiation of wall structure, although median dark line most conspicuous. Domed, flat or gently sagging tabulae occur in some corallites ; very rarely seen to be closely spaced (Pl. IV, fig. 2). Remarks. This New South Wales species appears to be closely similar morpho- logically to B. contigua (Hill, 1955) from the Gordon Limestone of Oceana Mine, Zeehan, except for having a slightly thinner corallite wall and in places more closely spaced tabulae. Bajgolia altaica Dziubo 1962 differs in having larger branch dimensions and in lacking tabulae. Bajgolia minor sp. nov. Pl. IV, figs 8-9 Material. Holotype (SUP 78164) and paratypes (SUP 78165-66) from the ‘“‘ lower coral’ unit of the lower part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Fossil Hill. Description. Small, ramose corallum, typically intimately intergrown with a bryozoan. Branches may form clusters of up to 20 corallites in close contact, or develop with more loosely aggregated bryozoan-supported corallites. Adult corallites range from 0-4 to 0-5 mm in diameter. Wall thickness mainly varies from 0-025 to 0-1mm. Fibrous sclerenchyme is represented in common wall adjacent to median dark line and at right angles to it; very rarely irregular inner margin of wall may be interpreted as suggesting presence of short spine- like elements. Bipartite adaxial increase at intervals of from 1 to 2 mm along length of corallite, as seen in one branch (PI. IV, fig. 8). Occasional gently updomed, flat or sagging tabulae observed in a few corallites, spaced from 0-1 to 0-3 mm apart. Remarks. Although exhibiting a similar ramose growth habit to other species of Bajgolia, B. minor is the finest and most slender species known. It is nearest to B. gracilis (Hill, 1975) from the Quondong Limestone of the Bowan Park Group, but has finer and thinner-walled corallites. Bajgolia gracilis (Hill, 1975) Pie oe es ai PE TV hie. 7. 1957. Hofletcheria gracilis Hill, p. 105, pl. 4, figs 17b, 22b. Material. Holotype (University of Queensland Collection, F 23253) from Bowan Park (Por.289, Par. Bowan, Co. Ashburnham). Partially silicified specimen (SUP 78217) from Davys Plains Limestone (‘‘ pisolite’’ unit) Member of Daylesford Limestone, and completely silicified specimens (SUP 78280-90) from the Quondong Limestone of the Bowan Park Group at Quondong (probably the same locality and horizon as the holotype), and from the upper part of the Regan’s Creek Limestone (SUP 28154-55). Numerous additional unnumbered specimens come from the Quondong Limestone, and the ‘“‘ Island ”’ unit of the upper part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek. Description. Ramose colony with branches varying from cylindrical to markedly compressed (almost flabellate) ; occasionally encrusted by bryozoans of more than one kind. Corallites are small and polygonal axially, wheras they assume larger more rounded forms towards periphery of the branches. Corallite dimensions usually from 0-5 to 0-8 mm, and wall thickness from 0-1 to 0:2 mm. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 3 174 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. Corallites exposed to exterior frequently show well marked fine transverse growth lines (Pl. III, figs 2, 5-6). Division of adaxial, parricidal bipartite (also rarely tripartite) type ; in some parts of branch division seems to be most frequent (Pl. III, figs 9-10), in others much less frequent (Pl. III, fig. 11). Tabulae rarely seen. Remarks. The present description is based on the abundant silicified material available in the collections of the Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney, and is intended to supplement the description previously given by Hill (1957). A silicified specimen (SUP 78292) of Bajgolia from the Manooka Limestone Member (Ischadites unit) of the Daylesford Formation (Bowan Park Group) ~ exhibits close resemblances to B. gracilis. However, the branch of the colony is only about 1-5-2-5 mm wide, and the corallites, usually from 0-7 to 0:9 mm in diameter, open obliquely at rather wider spaced intervals along the length of the branch. The specimen is only doubtfully assigned to the species. Bajgolia? grandis sp. nov. Pl. VI, figs 1-2; Pl. VII, figs 11-12 Material. Holotype (SUP 66154) from the “ Aulopora”’ unit of the upper part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek. The paratypes are silicified. Paratypes SUP 28205-06 are from the ‘ H-horizon’’ of the middle part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek, SUP 78291 is from the ‘‘ Island’ unit of the upper part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek, and SUP 26284 is from the Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group) at Quondong. Description. Large, loosely aggregated, ramose corallum with individual branches varying from about 7 to 23mm in diameter. Corallites mainly cylindrical and thick-walled, usually from 2-1 to 2-7 mm in diameter. Wall of variable thickness, ranging from 0-2 to 0-9 (typically from 0-4 to 0-5) mm in thickness. External surface of silicified corallites show transverse growth lines. Adaxial, bipartite, parricidal increase (Pl. VI, fig. 1); also suggestions of lateral offsets seen in some silicified specimens. Tabulae rare; flat to gently sagging. Remarks. The species is doubtfully assigned to the genus Bajgolia for the reason that some specimens show what seems to be lateral offsets, and the branches are not formed of the usual tightly aggregated bundles of corallites. Compared with B.? ida (Hill, 1955) from the Gordon Limestone of Ida Bay, Tasmania, it has larger branches and larger corallite dimensions. Another specimen (Pl. V, 8-9) from the ‘‘ Aulopora”’ unit at Licking Hole Creek seems to be allied to B.? grandis. It has fewer, more loosely clustered corallites in its branches and a greater predominance of free corallites. It has variable corallite dimensions usually from 1-8 to 3-0 mm, but in areas of active increase, corallite diameters from 1-0 to 1-8 mm are not uncommon (Pl. V, fig. 9). Wall in extremes up to 1-2 mm thick. Uneven bipartite division. Rare flat to sagging tabulae. Bajgolia? sp. PIV, figs 6=()0 Bl Wal, hieange Material. Two specimens (SUP 78194, 78196) from the ‘‘ Aulopora”’ unit of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek. Description. Dendroid colony composed of loosely interconnected branches and associated free corallites. Corallites usually from 2-7 to 3-5 mm wide. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watgzs, Vot. 101, Part 3 B. D. WEBBY 175 Corallite wall owing to silicification shows little original structure ; up to 1-2 mm thick. Uneven bipartite adaxial division. No tabulae. Superfamily AULOPORIDEA Family AULOPORIDAE Milne Edwards and Haime 1851 Genus AULOPORA Goldfuss 1829 Type species. Aulopora serpens Goldfuss 1829 Aulopora walliensis sp. nov. Pl. VIII, figs 1-7. Material. Wolotype (SUP 78293) from the ‘“ Island”’ unit, upper part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek, and paratypes from the Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group) at Paling Yards Creek (SUP 78294) and Quondong (SUP 77273-75, 78295). Other paratypes (SUP 77271-72) from same locality and horizon as the holotype. All material is silicified. Derivation of name. Walli, a few kms south of the Cliefden Caves Limestone outcrop at Licking Hole Creek. Description. Reptant colony, attached to either valve of brachiopod Trigrammaria in a type of commensal relationship. Corallites rim anterior to postero-lateral margin of valve and show prominent transverse growth lines or wrinkles (Pl. VIII, figs 4, 6), sometimes secondarily thickened (Pl. VIII, fig. 2). Usually two, or less commonly three, four or more rows of cylindrical to alveolitoid corallites encrust margin of valve. Deep calices. Lateral offsets usually occur at frequent intervals along margin; less common in early growth stages inside the margin. Notable change in character of growth in holotype (Pl. VIII, fig. 2) presumably due to early growth extending across concave protected part of external surface, while later growth on more exposed and abraded outer margin was much thickened. Adult corallites mainly from 1-6 to 2-2 mm in diameter but in extremes may reach 2-4mm across. Oorallite wall from 0-2 to 0-4mm across. No tabulae or septal structures seen. Remarks. 'The nature of the transverse wrinkles on the outer wall of A. walliensis might imply a relationship with the problematical cone-like group, the corn- ulitids, possibly the compound representative Conchicolites Nicholson (see Fisher, 1962). However, tabulate coral genera such as LHofletcheria and Lyopora also exhibit such wrinkling of the epitheca. Bassler (1950, p. 266) has previously noted the similarity of wall corrugation in cornulitids and Hofletcheria. Indeed, it seems likely that some, if not all, the so-called ‘‘ gregarious commensal ”’ cornulitids (Richards, 1974) are tabulate corals. Aulopora sp. A Pl. VI, figs 5-6. Material. One specimen (SUP 78225) from limestone in the lower part of the Goonumbla Voleanics, Currajong Park, just north of Gunningbland. Description. Corallum reptant at base ; attached to colony of Heliolites although actual contact mainly disrupted by pressure solution with stylolite being formed. Corallites have upward turning, horn-shaped form; in contact proximally ; mainly free upwards; attain diameters of from 1-6 to 2-9mm well above reptant base ; wall of corallites also thickens noticeably to from 0-6 to 0-7 mm. Very deep calice. Tiny, discrete septal spines in stereozone, rarely extending into lumen; embedded in lamellar sclerenchyme of peripheral stereozone. Individual corallites along reptant base are interconnected; may represent connecting tubules or corallites actively undergoing fission. No tabulae seen. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 3 176 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. Aulopora sp. B Pl. VIII, figs 10-13 Material. Silicified specimens (SUP 78296-98) encrusting brachiopods Eodinobolus? and Sowerbyites from the “Island” unit of the upper Chefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek. Description. Corallum reptant at base; above base corallites turn upward and become inclined to near vertical tubes. Corallites from 1-3 to 1-7 mm in diameter. Wall from 0-2 to 0-5 mm in thickness ; microstructure destroyed by silicification. Calice very deep. No tabulae or septal structures seen. Epitheca smooth to faintly transversely undulating. Lateral offsets only seen to occur on reptant base. : Remarks. Another silicified specimen (Pl. VII, figs 13-15) encrusting the antero- lateral margin of the brachial valve of a Sowerbyella is also comparable with Aulopora sp. B, but has a more irregular growth habit. Corallites are from 1-5 to 1:9mm in diameter, and the wall thickness is from 0-2 to 0:3 mm. Calices are deep, and epitheca exhibits weak, transverse growth lines. Aulopora sp. C Pl. VIII, figs 8-9 Material. Silicified specimen (SUP 78291) encrusting the brachiopod Holtedahlina from the ‘“‘ Island ’’ unit, upper part of the Cliefden Caves Limestone at Licking Hole Creek. Description. Small, reptant colony which encrusts external surface of brachial valve of Holtedahlina. Radiates outwards to lateral margin and covers gap in two valves, suggesting that the encrustation took place after death of the brachiopod. Corallites from 1-0 to 1-2 mm in diameter; wall thickness from 0-2to0-3mm. Lateral offsets common. No septal structures or tabulae seen. Family AULOCYSTIDAE Sokolov 1950 Genus ADAVERINA Klaamann 1969 Type species. Syringocystis adaverensis Klaamann 1966. Adaverina acritos sp. nov. Pl. IX, figs 1-8 Material. Holotype (SUP 78214) from the limestone unit at the top of the Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill. Description. Corallum phaceloid; specimen of holotype measuring 90 mm across and 110mm high. Corallites slender, cylindrical, usually not in contact except at points of division; range from about 1-3 to 2-0 (on average from 1-5 to 1-7) mm in diameter. Calice deep, with variable U-shaped to acutely funnel-shaped form. Septa represented by tiny holacanthine? spines set in vertical and horizontal series and embedded in lamellar sclerenchyme of the peripheral stereozone; more than 20 septa in an average corallite; either confined to the stereozone or extend a short distance in from it; stereozone varies in thickness from 0-1 to 0-4 (on average from 0-2 to 0-3) mm thick. Increase is of lateral, non-parricidal type—not off the outer wall but arising from peripheral part of parent corallite. No connecting tubules seen. Tabulae syringoporoid and most variable along the length of individual corallites ; in addition to complete sagging, flat and domed plates, there are commonly inclined complete and incomplete infundibuliform plates, some being extremely large elements which extend considerable distances vertically, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALEs, VoL. 101, Part 3 ei i I i B. D. WEBBY IUPE7 | and are in places parallel to side walls; a few smaller elements on side walls resemble dissepiments ; an axially or slightly eccentric placed syrinx is sometimes developed but tends to be discontinuous along the length of the corallite. Septal spines are not seen to occur on tabulae. Remarks. Klaamann’s (1966) species of Adaverina, A. adaverensis and A. acclinis from the Upper Llandovery of Estonia, are not closely similar to A. acritos. The New South Wales species has much smaller corallite diameters, more conspicuou slateral budding and a more disordered arrangement of tabulae. But for the lack of connecting tubules, A. acritos would seem to be assignable to the genus Syringopora Goldfuss. The type of lateral, non-parricidal increase (Oliver, 1968) differs from lateral increase off the outer wall of the ‘‘ mother ”’ corallite (see examples of lateral increase in Hillophyllum sp., Webby, 1971, fig. 6A-C, H-J). It has been referred to previously as peripheral non-parricidal ‘‘ budding” (see Palaeophyllum macrocaule Webby, 1972, Pl. IX, figs 6, 8). Perhaps a distinction should be drawn between outer lateral and inside lateral types of increase. Superfamily AULOPORIIDEA ? Family FLETCHERIIDAE Zittel 1876 Genus FLETCHERIA Milne Edwards and Haime 1851 Type species. Fletcheria tubifera Milne Edwards and Haime, 1851. Fletcheria? stipulosa sp. nov. Pl. VII, figs 1-10; Pl. IX, figs 9-10 Material. Numerous silicified specimens from the Gerybong Limestone Member (‘‘ gastropod”? unit) of the Daylesford Limestone (lower part of the Bowan Park Group—Semeniuk, 1972) near Quondong; usually associated with Tetradium tenue Webby and Semeniuk. Holotype is SUP 78215; others (SUP 26289-92, 41801, 41804, 78216, 78270-79, 78299) designated paratypes. Description. Corallum dendroid; composed of long wavy corallites usually separated except at points of quadripartite division and where connected in series to form discontinuous chains; up to ten corallites linked in such chains. Calice moderately deep and usually with flat floor. Corallites mainly from 2-7 to 4-0 mm in diameter ; occasionally they reach diameter of up to 4-8 mm just. prior to division, and may be down to 2-0 mm immediately after division ; corallites have rounded outline away from areas of active division, and near points of division tend to be subquadrate. Increase is of the parricidal, adaxial, equal quadripartite kind. No septal structures apart from dividing walls, which appear at intervals just prior to division. Thickness of corallite wall varies from 0:15 to 0-35mm. Horizontal growth lines seen on outer wall of some well preserved specimens. Tabulae usually preserved as complete horizontal elements spaced on average from four to six in 5 mm. Remarks. Sokolov (1955) in reviewing the literature relating to Fletcheria Milne Edwards and Haime 1851 (type species, /’. tubifera, from the Silurian of Gotland) concluded that the genus had come to be recognised as including a number of widely divergent forms—representatives of several different tabulate coral families and even rugosans. The genus has more recently been restricted to representatives of the Family Fletcheriidae exhibiting peripheral (or ‘‘ calicular’’) type increase, usually with four offsets, thin intermittent laminar-type septa and horizontal tabulae (Sokolov, 1955, 1962). Specimens of the type species, FI. tubifera, have been observed by Stasinska (1967) as Jacking septal spines and showing “ intracalycal’’ increase with five offsets. Duncan (1956) has also indicated that increase the in type species is characteristically not PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoOcrIETy OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 3 178 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. quadripartite. Fletcheria quadrifida Leleshus 1972 from the Silurian of Tadzkikstan, which exhibits rows of septal spines rather than laminar-type septa, should perhaps be excluded from the genus. Fletcheria? stipulosa has previously been interpreted as a “‘ coral resembling Pycnostylus’”’ (Semeniuk, 1970) and as a large Tetradium syringoporoides-type of coral, up to 3-5 mm in corallite diameter, with closely spaced tabulae and quadripartite division at widely spaced intervals—possibly a new tetradiid genus (Webby and Semeniuk, 1971, p. 247). Although it is tentatively assigned to the auloporids, following Sokolov (1962), the occurrence of axial increase involving extension of four laminar-type ‘‘ septa ’’ (more properly dividing walls) suggests a relationship with tetradiids. Assignment of the species to Fletcheria is not entirely satisfactory, in the light of Stasinska’s and Dunecan’s observations that the type species, /. tubifera, exhibits increase which is characteristically not quadripartite. However, it does not seem justified until Fletcheria and its allies are more adequately revised to introduce a new tetradiid genus to accommodate the species, especially as it is mainly based on silicified material. Nor can the species be satisfactorily assigned to the rugosan genus Pycnostylus Whiteaves since it only exhibits four tetradiid-type dividing walls rather than the more normal numerous short ‘‘ laminar ” septa (see Hill, 1940). The New South Wales species seems to bear the closest similarities to Fletcheria deadwoodensis Norford 1962 from the Silurian Sandpile Group of British Columbia, but differs in exhibiting on average slightly larger corallites, more widely spaced tabulae, and in showing a tendency for the colony to adopt a chain-like character. Superfamily HALYSITOIDEA Family HALYSITIDAE Milne Edwards and Haime 1850 Genus CATENIPORA Lamarck 1816 Type species. Cateniporae scharoides Lamarck 1816. Catentpora ef. obliqua (Fischer-Benzon 1871) Pl. X, fig. 4 Material. Two specimens (SUP 29103, 27214) from the limestone breccia at the top of the Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill. Description. Corallum reaches a size of at least 120 mm across; usually forms loose meshwork of open meandering chains with moderately frequent T-shaped junctions. Up to ten corallites in an individual rank. Calice of variable depth, in extremes up to1-9 mm deep. Corallites oval in cross section mainly from about 1-7 to 1-9 mm in length and from 1-1 to 1-4 mm in width. Offsets usually issue from mid wall of a corallite rather than between adjacent corallites. Walls mainly from 0-2 to 0:3 mm thick. Septal spines short, in places just protrude inward beyond thickened wall; form in horizontal and vertical rows (probably 12). ‘‘ Balken ”? structure may occur in intercorallite wall (Pl. X, fig. 4). Tabulae thin, normally complete, horizontal to slightly sagging, from 12 to 14 in 5 mm. Remarks. The New South Wales species is closely related to Catenipora obliqua (Fischer-Benzon, 1871) from the late Ordovician (Nabala, Vormsi and Pirgu stages) of Estonia (Klaamann, 1966). However the sinuous ranks of the New South Wales form are not seen to link together to form large lacunae as in the Estonian species. Catenipora clausa sp. nov. PLAX hes, 25.9 Material. Holotype SUP 75224; another specimen (SUP 78222) designated a paratype. Limestone breccia at the top of the Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 3 B. D. WEBBY 179 Description. Corallum with frequent T-junctions and sometimes forming lacunae, a few being as small as 2-2-2-5mm in longest dimensions (Pl. X, fig. 2); composed of moderately closely spaced meshwork of sinuous chains. Holotype measures approximately 65 by 40 mm across and 75 mm high ; associ- ated with Grewingkia sp. Up to 11 corallites in an individual rank. Offsets usually from midwall of a corallite, but rarely may also occur between adjacent corallites (Pl. X, fig. 1). Calice 1-5 mm deep. Corallites oval in cross section, typically from 1-5 to 1-9 mm in length and from 1-2 to 1-5 mmin width. Walls are usually rather thick, from 0-30 to 0:-45mm. Septal spines rarely seen to protrude beyond much thickened wall. ‘‘ Balken”’ structure may be seen in intercorallite wall. Tabulae are thin, usually complete, flat to gently sagging ; in holotype from 14 to 20 in 5mm. However paratype exhibits much more spaced widely tabulae, typically from 8 to 12 in 5 mm. Remarks. Catenipora clausa differs from C. cf. obliqua in having small lacunae, and in having a thicker corallite wall. Catenipora sp. Pl. X, figs 6-7 Material. One specimen (SUP 78207) found recently by I. G. Percival from a limestone breccia towards the base of the Malongulli Formation at the ** Kurrajongs ”’ in the Licking Hole Creek area, near Walli. Description. The moderately large silicified specimen exhibits closed, usually elongated meshes ranging from a minimum diameter of 3 to 9 mm to a maximum diameter of at least 25mm. Oorallites have a length of from 1-3 to 1-5 mm anda width of from1-:0to1-2mm. Wall thickness is from 0-15to0-:25mm. Vertical rows of tiny septal spines may be seen in silicified interiors of the wall, and give a denticulate appearance to the inner wall of the corallites, as seen in transverse section. Tabulae are characteristically domed (less commonly flat), complete, with a vertical spacing of from 10 to 12 in 5mm; very rarely seen to occur as incomplete elements. Remarks. This distinctive species perhaps has closest resemblances to C. wrighti Klaamann, 1965, but this European late Ordovician species has mainly horizontal tabulae (Klaamann, 1965, 1966). Genus HALYSITES Fischer von Waldheim 1813 Type species. Tubipora catenularia Linnaeus 1767. H alysites Sp. Pl. X, figs 8-9 Material. Four specimens (SUP 78208-09, 78211, 78252) from limestone lens in the Angullong Tuff at Rodds Creek (Locality CO. 1/50 of Smith, 1966, pp. 245, 261). Description. Mainly small fragmentary specimens with variable form. Some with small lacunae from 1 to 6mm, others with more widely spaced lacunae, and a few apparently open chains. Ranks with moderately common T-junctions and offsets issuing from off the side wall of individual corallites. Both corallites and tubules well differentiated. Corallites have oval-shaped cross section mainly from 1:4 to 1-8 mm in length and from 1-0 to1-2 mm in width. Tubules have quadrate outline, and are from 0:3 to 0:5 mm across. Wall is from 0-1 to 0-2mm thick. Tubulae mainly horizontal; in corallites spaced from 10 to 13 in 5 mm, whereas in tubules from three to five per mm. Remarks. This species is markedly different from H. praecedens Webby and Semeniuk from the upper part of the Clearview Limestone Member of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 3 180 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. Ballingoole Limestone (Bowan Park Group), exhibiting definite lacunae with more frequent branching of chains, and more closely spaced tabulae. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The work was aided by funds from the Australian Research Grants Committee (A.R.G.C. Grant No. E73/15102). Professor Dorothy Hill is thanked for her helpful criticism of the manuscript. Associate Professor G. H. Packham and Mr. I. G. Percival kindly contributed material collected by them. References Basster, R. S., 1950.—Faunal lists and descriptions of Palaeozoic corals. Geol. Soc. Am. Mem., 44: 1-315. ‘ Bititrnes, E., 1859.—Fossils of the Chazy Limestone, with descriptions of new species. Can. Nat. Geol., 4 : 426—470. Duncan, H.; 1956.—Ordovician and Silurian coral faunas of western United States. Bull. U.S: Geol. Surv., 1021—F : 209-236. Dzruso, P. 8., 1962.—Novyi rod tabuljat iz ordovika gornogo Altaja. Tr. Sib. Nauchnoizsled. Inst. Geol., Geofiz.Miner. Ser., 23 : 154-155. , 1965.—Sistematicheski 1 biostratigraficheskij obzor ordovikskich tabuljat 1 geoliolitid gornogo Altajaigorno] Shori. In Sokolov, B.S.,and Dubatolov, V. N. (eds), Tabuljatomorfnye korally ordovika 7 silura SSSR. Moscow: Institut Geologii 1 Geofiziki, Sibirskoe Otdelenie, Akademia Nauk : 29-34. Epwarps, H. M., and Haime, J., 1850.—A monograph of the British fossil corals...Part I. Introduction. London : Palaeontographical Society. Ixxxv-+71 p. , and , 1851.—Monographie des Polypiers fossiles des Terrains palaeozoiques. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., 5: 1-502. ErHerRipGe, R., 1909.—An organism allied to Mitcheldeania Wethered of the Carboniferous Limestone, in the upper Silurian of Malongulli. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 8: 308-311. FIscHER-BENzON, R. von, 1871.—Mikroskopische untersuchungen tiber die Struktur der Halysites— Arten. Abh. Naturwiss. Ver.Hamburg, 5: 1-31. FiscuerR Von WaALpHEIM, G., 1813.—Zoognosia tabulis synopticus illustrata. 3rd ed. Vol. 1. Moscow. i—xiv, 465 p. FisHER, D. W., 1962.—Small conoidal shells of uncertain affinities. Im Moore, R. C. (ed), Treatise on “invertebrate paleontology. Part W. Miscellanea: W98-143. Lawrence, Kansas : University of Kansas Press. Goupruss, G. A., 1829.—Petrefacta Germaniae. Teil 1. Dusseldorf : 77-164. Hitt, D., 1940.—The Silurian Rugosa of the Yass-Bowning District, N.S.W. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65 : 388-420. , 1953.—The Middle Ordovician of the Oslo region, Norway. 2. Some rugose and tabulate corals. Nor. Geol. Tidsskr., 31 : 143-168. , 1955.—Ordovician corals from Ida Bay, Queenstown and Zeehan, Tasmania. Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tasm., 89 : 237-254. ————, 1957.— Ordovician corals from New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 91 : 97—107. , and Stumm, E. C., 1956.—Zoantharia Tabulata. Jn Moore, R. C. (ed.), Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part F. Coelenterata : ¥444-476. Lawrence, Kansas : University of Kansas Press. KiaER, J., 1930.—Den fossilforende ordovicisk-siluriske lagrekke pa stord. Bergen Mus. Aarbok Naturvitensk. Rekke, 11 : 48—49. KLAAMANN, E., 1965.—Tabulata (pp. 422—428). In Kaljo, D., and Klaamann, E. The fauna of the Portrane Limestone. III. The Corals. Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.) Geol., 10 : 415—434. , 1966.—Inkommunikatny tabuljaty Eston. Tallinn: Hesti NSV Teaduste Akademia. Geologia Institut : 1-96. , 1969.—Adaverina—Novoe nazvanie dlja Syringocystis Klaamann, 1966 (Tabuljaty). Iz. Akad. Nauk. Est. SSR, Ser. Geol., 18: 88. Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de M., 1816.—Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres. Vol. 2. Paris. 568 p. Lamse, M. L., 1899.—A revision of the genera and species of Canadian Palaeozoic corals : Part I, The Madreporaria Perforata and the Aleyonaria. Contrib. Can. Paleontol., 4: 1—96. LevesHus, V. L., 1972.—Szluriyskie tabuljaty Tadzhikistana. Dushanbe: Institut Geologi, Akademia Nauk Tadzhikskoi SSR : 1-85. LInnEAUS, C., 1767.—Systema Naturae. 12th ed. Vol. 1. Part 2. Stockholm : 533-1327. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF New SoutH WALES, Vot. 101, Part 3 B. D. WEBBY 181 McLean, R. A., 1974.—The Geology of the Regan’s Creek area, near Cargo, central New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 98: 196-221. Norrorp, B. 8., 1962.—The Silurian fauna of the Sandpile Group of northern British Columbia. Bull. Geol. Surv. Can., 78: 1-51. Oxutitcu, V. J., 1937.—Notes on Fletcheria incerta (Billings) and Fletcheria sinclairin. sp. Trans. R. Can. Inst., 21 : 313-316. Ouiver, W. A. Jr., 1966.—Description of dimorphism in Striatopora flexuosa Hall. Palaeontology, 9: 448-454. , 1968.—Some aspects of colony development in corals. Paleontol. Soc. Mem., 2 [J. Paleontol., 42]: 16-34. Ricuarps, R. P., 1974.—Ecology of the Cornulitidae. J. Paleontol., 48 : 514-523. SEMENIUK, V., 1970.—The Lower-Middle Palaeozoic stratigraphy of the Bowan Park area, central- western New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 103 : 15—30. , 1973.—The stratigraphy of the Bowan Park Group, New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 105 : 77-85. Srnciair, G. W., 1961.—Notes on some Ordovician corals. Bull. Geol. Surv. Can., 80: 9-18. SmitH, R. H., 1966.—The geology of Mandurama-Panuara. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 98 : 239-262. Soxouoy, B. 8., 1950.—Silurijskie korally zapada Sibirskoj platformy. Vopr. Paleontol., 1 : 211— 242. , 1951.—Tabulyaty paleozoya Evropeiskoi chasti SSSR. Ch. 1. Ordovik Zapadnogo Urala i Pribaltiki. Tr. Vses. Nauchnoizsled. Geol. Razved. Inst., n.s., 48: 1-132. , 1955.—Tabuljaty paleozoja Evropejskoj chasti SSSR. Vvedenie. Jr. Vses. Nauch- novizsled. Geol. Razved. Inst., n.s., 85 : 3-328. , 1962.—Podklass Tabulata. Tabuljaty. In Orlov, Y. A. (ed.), Osnovy paleontologi. I1- (pp. 192-265). Moscow : Akademia Nauk. , and Mrronova, N. V., 1959.—O novom rode ordovikskicj korallov Zapadnoj Sibiri i Severnogo Kazachstana. Dokl. Akad. Nauk. SSSRK., 129 : 1150-1153. StTasinsKA, A., 1967.—Tabulata from Norway, Sweden and from the erratic boulders of Poland. Palaeontol. Pol., 18 : 1-112. Wessy, B. D., 1969.—Ordovician stromatoporoids from New South Wales. Palaeontology, 12 : 637-662. , 1971.—The new Ordovician genus Hillophyllum and the early history of rugose corals with acanthine septa. Lethaia, 4: 158-168. , 1972.—The rugose coral Palaeophyllum Billings from the Ordovician of central New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 97 : 150-157. , 1975.—Succession of Ordovician coral and stromatoporoid faunas from central-western New South Wales, Australia. Jn Sokolov, B. 8S. (ed.), Ancient Cnidaria. Vol. II. Novosibirsk : Nauka : 57-68. , 1976.—The Ordovician System in South-Eastern Australia. Jn Bassett, M. G. (ed.), The Ordovician System. Cardiff: University of Wales Press: 417-446. , and SEMENIUE, V., 1969.—Ordovician halysitid corals from New South Wales. Lethaia, 2 : 345-360. , 1971. The Ordovician coral genus Tetradium Dana from New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 95 : 246-259. ZitteL, K. A., 1876.—Palaeozoologie. Vol. 1. Munich. 765 p. EXPLANATION OF PLATES Prate II Figs 1-7. Bajgolia caespitosa sp. nov., lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone. 1-2. Transverse-oblique sections from “ lower coral ”’ unit at Licking Hole Creek, SUP 78191, x 4. 3. Longitudinal section of holotype from “ mixed fauna ”’ unit east of Fossil Hill, SUP 78179, x 4. 4. Longitudinal section from “‘ mixed fauna ”’ unit west of Boonderoo shearing shed, SUP 78183, x4. 5. Transverse section of holotype from “* mixed fauna ” unit east of Fossil Hill, SUP 78179, x7. 6-7. Transverse sections of SUP 78181 from “ mixed fauna” unit west of Boonderoo shearing shed, showing details of bipartite division, x 7. Fig. 8. Bajgolia cf. caespitosa sp. nov., transverse-oblique section of part of large colony probably from lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone (precise locality and horizon not known), SUP 78190, x4. Fig. 9. Bajgolia furcata sp. nov., transverse-oblique section of branch of colony from “ lower rcoal”’ unit, lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Fossil Hill; holotype, SUP 78155, x 4. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH Wass, Vou. 101, Part 3 182 ORDOVICIAN TABULATE CORALS OF N.S.W. Pruate IIT Figs 1-11. Bajgolia gracilis (Hill, 1957), silicified specimens from Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group), Quondong, x 3. I. Lateral view of exterior of branch, SUP 78282. 2. Lateral view of incomplete branch, SUP 78281. Note fine transverse growth lines on external surface. 3-4. Views of lateral and top surfaces of branching colony, SUP 78286. 5—7. Exterior views of two sides and top of flabellate branching colony, SUP 78280. Note fine transverse growth lines on exterior. 8-9. Oblique lateral view of exterior, and longitudinal view of interior of colony, SUP 78283. Note bipartite division in Fig. 9. 10. View of interior of branch showing bipartite division, SUP 78287. 11. View of interior of branch fragment exhibiting few divisions, SUP 78284. Fig. 12. Bajgolia furcata? sp. nov., external view of part of branch ; SUP 28153 from upper part of Regan’s Creek Limestone, x 3. PLate IV Figs 1, 4-6. Bajgolia furcata sp. nov., from “ lower coral’ unit, lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Fossil Hill. 1. Colony arising off a reptant base of attachment with a bryozoan, SUP 78154, x4. 4. Transverse-oblique section of SUP 78151, x4. 5. Longitudinal section of holotype, SUP 78155, x4. 6. Transverse section of SUP 78152, x7. Note individual corallites in process of bipartite division. Figs 2-3. Bajgolia cf. contigua (Hill, 1955). Longitudinal-oblique and transverse-oblique sections of SUP 78177 from “ lower coral” unit, lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, x 4. Note bryozoan intergrowth. Fig. 7. Bajgolia gracilis (Hill, 1957) longitudinal-oblique section of partially silicified branch from Davys Plains Limestone Member, Daylesford Limestone (Bowan Park Group), SUP 78217, x 4. Figs 8-9. Bajgolia minor sp. nov., longitudinal and oblique sections of holotype SUP 78164 from “‘ lower coral ”’ unit, lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Fossil Hill, x4. Note intimate intergrowth association with bryozoan. PLatTe V Figs 1-5. Hofletcheria hadra sp. nov., from lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone. 1—4. From the ‘“‘ mixed fauna ’”’ unit west of Boonderoo shearing shed. 1. Longitudinal section showing paratype SUP 78223, and in bottom right corner part of holotype SUP 78185, x4. 2-3. Holotype, SUP 78185. 2. Transverse section, x4. 3. Transverse section showing detail of wall with radially aligned fibrous tissue, x7. 4. Transverse section of paratype SUP 78184, x4. 5. Longitudinal section showing encrustation of colony on Tetradium cribriforme (Etheridge), SUP 78163, x4, from “ lower coral’ unit, Fossil Hill. ? Figs 6-7. Bajgolia? sp. from “ Aulopora’”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. 6. Transverse section of SUP 78194, x4. 7. Longitudinal section of SUP 78196, x 4. ) Figs 8-9. Bajgolia? aff. grandis sp. nov., from “ Aulopora”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. 8. Longitudinal-oblique section of SUP 78195, x4, 9. Transverse section of SUP 78195, x 4. PratEe VI Figs 1-2. Bajygolia? grandis sp. nov., x 4. Longitudinal section of holotype, SUP 66154, from “ Aulopora’”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. 2. Transverse section of paratype, SUP 78205, from “ H-horizon ”’, middle part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. Fig. 3. Bajgolia cf. furcata sp. nov., longitudinal section of SUP 78220 from lower part of Reedy Creek Limestone, north of Molong, x 4. Fig. 4. Hofletcheria hadra sp. nov., longitudinal section of paratype SUP 78223 from “ mixed fauna ”’ unit, lower part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, west of Boonderoo shearing shed, x 4. Figs 5-6. Aulopora sp. A, x 4. SUP 78225 from limestone, lower part of Goonumbla Voleanics, Currajong Park near Gunningbland. 5. Upturning corallites from a reptant base. 6. Section of colony approximately at right angles to that shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 7. Bajgolia? sp., transverse-oblique section from “* Aulopora”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek, SUP 78196, x 4. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw South WaAtzgzs, Vou. 101, Part 3 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE 1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE TI PLATE IV 3 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. Vol. 101, Part LE eae Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE V Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE VI SSS Se ONE Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE VII Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE VII Proc. LInN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE Ix Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 3 PLATE X B. D. WEBBY 183 Pirate VII Figs 1-10. Fletcheria? stipulosa sp. nov., paratypes from Gerybong Limestone Member, Daylesford Limestone (Bowan Park Group) at Quondong. (Figs 1-4, 10, x 2-5; Figs 5-9, x3.) 1. SUP 78271, oblique view of quadripartite increase. 2. SUP 78272, external view of four-fold division. 3-4. SUP 78270, side and top views of colony exhibiting chain-like form. 5. SUP 78277, internal view of dividing wall between two corallites and horizontal tabulae. 6-9. Stages in development of four offsets. 6. SUP 78273, initial stage of division with fusion axially of four septa-like walls. 7. SUP 78274. 8. SUP 78275. 9. SUP 78276, showing almost complete separation of individual offsets. 10. Lateral view of SUP 78278, showing division, an exterior with fine transverse growth lines and cut-away exhibiting interior with near horizontal tabulae. Figs 11-12. Bajgolia? grandis sp. nov., *2. 11. Oblique view of SUP 78291 from ‘ Island ’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. 12. Side view of exterior of SUP 26284 from Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group), Quondong. Figs 13-15. Aulopora sp., views of colony encrusting antero-lateral margin of brachial valve of Sowerbyella. SUP 77270, x 2-5, from “ Island ” unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. Pirate VIII Figs 1-7. Aulopora walliensis sp. nov., silicified colonies encrusting brachiopod T'rigrammaria. 1-3. Holotype SUP 78293 from “ Island’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. 1-2, x2;3, x3. 4-5. Small colony SUP 78295, x2-5. 4. Lateral view. 5. Top view showing alveolitoid corallites. 6-7. SUP 78294, x2-5. 6. Lateral view showing prominent fine transverse growth lines. 7. Top view exhibiting two to three rows of cylindrical to alveolitoid corallites. Figured paratypes are from Quondong Limestone (Bowan Park Group) ; SUP 78295 from Quondong, and SUP 78294 from Paling Yards Creek. Figs 8-9. Aulopora sp. C. Brachial and anterior views of brachiopod Holtedahlina showing silicified encrusting colony, SUP 78291, x2-5. ‘‘Island”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Limestone, Licking Hole Creek. Figs 10-13. Aulopora sp. B, x 2-5, from “ Island ”’ unit, upper part of Cliefden Caves Lime - stone, Licking Hole Creek. 10-11. Top and side views of silicified colony encrusting Sowerbyttes, SUP 78298. 12. Oblique view of silicified colony, SUP 78297. 13. Top view of silicified colony enerusting brachiopod Hodinobolus?, SUP 78296. Pirate IX Figs 1-8. Adaverina acritos sp. nov., from limestone, top of Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill ; holotype SUP 78214. 1. Transverse section, x4. 2. Longitudinal section, x 4. 3. Transverse section, x7. 4. Longitudinal section, x4. 5. Longitudinal section, x4. 6. Longitudinal section, x4. 7. Longitudinal-oblique section, x4. 8. Longitudinal section, x 7. Figs 9-10. Fletcheria? stipulosa sp. nov., transverse and longitudinal views of holotype SUP 78215, x4, from Gerybong Limestone Member, Daylesford Limestone (Bowan Park Group), Quondong. PLatTe X Figs 1-3, 5. Catenipora clausa sp. nov., from limestone breccia, top of the Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill, x4. 1-2. Transverse sections of holotype SUP 75224 (associated with Grewingkia sp., SUP 75223). 3. Longitudinal section of paratype SUP 78222. 5. Longitudinal section of holotype SUP 75224. Fig. 4. Catenipora ef. obliqua (Fischer-Benzon, 1871) from limestone breccia, top of Malachi’s Hill Beds, north-east of Malachi’s Hill, x 4; transverse section of SUP 29103. Figs 6-7. Catenipora sp. from limestone breccia near base of Malongulli Formation, “‘ Kurra- jongs ”’, Licking Hole Creek, SUP 28207, x4. 6. Transverse section showing large lacunae. 7. Longitudinal section. Figs 8-9. Halysites sp., from limestone lens in Angullong Tuff, Rodds Creek, x5. 8. Transverse section of SUP 78252. 9. Longitudinal section of SUP 78209. AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO. LTD . 71-79 ARUNDEL ST., GLEBE, N.S.W., 2037 1977 wa é oy Copies of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES (with the exception of a few volumes and Parts) may be purchased from the Society, Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000. Current charges for the PROCEEDINGS are : Volumes—$16.00 each for 1st Series (Volumes 1-10) ; $11.00 each for 2nd Series (Volumes 11-20) and all subsequent volumes. Parts—$5.00 each for all back parts; $4.00 each for current Parts. For volumes of 5 or 6 Parts, $1.00 each for first and last Parts. Prices do not include postage. Subscription to the PROCEEDINGS—$20.00 per volume, plus $2.50 postage— $22.50. All prices are in Australian currency. These charges may be revised from time to time, and inquiries should be addressed to The Secretary, Linnean Society of New South Wales, Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000, Australia. The Society’s PROCEEDINGS are printed and published for the Society by the Australasian Medical Publishing Co., Ltd., 71-79 Arundel Street, Glebe, N.S.W., 2037. PROCEEDINGS: OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES ISSN : 0047-4746. Coden : PLSW-A Proceedings, Volume 101, Part 3, 1977 CONTENTS ALLEN, GERALD R. A new dag of ec fish Daa from Western Australia j s ae ScHIcHA, E. Immature stages of three mite species ae Piha ae from apple in Australia st a ae : : SupDzuKI, MINoRU., and Timms, B. V. A new species of Brachionus (Rotifera) from the Myall Lakes, New South Wales ‘ Wessy, B. D. Upper ordovician tabulate corals from Central- Western New South Wales ; Page 145 149 162 167 Proceedings ae mummeen society) =| mn of New South Wales: i le, Mas Beved 28th July, 1977 VOLUME I0I iL PART 4 fF 3 No. 448 The Linnean Society of New South Wales Founded 1874. Incorporated 1884 “‘ For the cultivation and study of the science of Natural History in all its branches ” OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1976-77 President Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. Vice-Presidenis H. G. Cogger, M.Sec., Ph.D. ; D. W. Edwards, B.Sc.Agr. ; P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D.; T.G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. Honorary Treasurer Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Se., F.L.S. Secretary Ruth J. Inall Council Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. F. W. E. Rowe, B.Sec., Ph.D., M.I.Biol., H. G. Cogger, M.Se., Ph.D. E.LS. D. W. Edwards, B.Sc.Agr. P. J. Stanbury, Ph.D. L. A. S. Johnson, D.Se. N. G. Stephenson, M.Se., Ph.D. D. McAlpine, M.Sc., Ph.D. T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. Helene A. Martin, Ph.D. - Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Sce., F.L.S. Lynette A. Moffat, B.Se., Ph.D. J.T. Waterhouse, B.Sc., M.Se. (N.S.W.), P. Myerscough, M.A., D. Phil. M.Se. (R’ding), F.L.S. J. Pickard, B.Sc.Agr. B. D. Webby, M.Sc., Ph.D. A. Ritchie, B.Sc., Ph.D. A. J. T. Wright, B.Se., Ph.D. Auditors W. Sinclair and Company, Chartered Accountants Linnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology, University of Sydney K. Y. Cho, Ph.D. Lnbrarian Constance B. McKay, B.A., A.L.A.A. The Society’s Headquarters are in Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, My N.S.W. 2000, Australia he NEW RECORDS AND SPECIES OF LAELAPS AND ALLIED GENERA FROM AUSTRALASIA (ACARI: DERMANYSSIDAE). PART 2 ROBERT DomRow* [Accepted for publication 21st September 1976] Synopsis Andreacarus balanites, n. sp., figured and described from a bandicoot, Peroryctes longicauda (Peramelidae), in New Guinea, is the first extra-Australian member of the radfordi species-group. Thadeua, n. nom., is proposed for Australolaelaps Womersley, preoccupied by Australolaelaps Girault (Hymenoptera). 7. serrata, n. sp., is figured and described from the swamp wallaby, Wallabia bicolor (Macropodidae), in Victoria. Interesting new host-records and considerable extensions of range are recorded for thirty more species in the following sixteen dermanyssid genera: Andreacarus, Gymnolaelaps, Laelapsella, Mesolaelaps, Haemolaelaps, Androlaelaps, Laelaps, Neolaelaps, Domrownyssus, Trichosurolaelaps, Thadeua, Bewsiella, Ichoronyssus, Macronyssus, Ornithonyssus, and Pneumonyssus. Seventeen previously unknown stages (all the seldom seen male and immatures) are figured and described from this material. INTRODUCTION Dermanyssid mites have utilized all manner of habitats as free-living predators and parasites, but, despite the resultant structural plasticity, they have retained the stable ontogeny (developmental morphology) that is so characteristic of mesostigmatic mites in general (Evans and Till, 1965). Short series of parasitic members of the family frequently contain only females, but males, both nymphal stages, and larvae are seldom collected, apparently being nest-dwellers which feed only temporarily, if at all, on the host (Evans and Till, 1965). Consequently, long series of mites from some common small mammals, mostly in eastern Australia, and other recent accessions, have yielded a useful variety of undescribed stages of species largely known only from females. These are studied below, together with new records of related species. Suprageneric taxa, morphological terms, and setal signatures follow Evans and Till (1965, 1966), except for the tarsi of legs II-IV (Evans, 1969). The term ‘‘holotrichous ’’ implies the situation in typical free-living dermanyssids, see Fig. 35. Measurements are in micrometres, each division on the scales representing 100 um. Hosts are given after Laurie and Hill (1954), Leach (1958), and Ride (1970). Genus ANDREACARUS Radford Andreacarus Radford, 1953, Parasitology, 42: 240. Type-species A. petersz Radford, 1953. Andreacarus balanites, n. sp. (Figs 1-2) Types. Wolotype 9 and one paratype 2 from bandicoot, Peroryctes longicauda (Peters and Doria) (Marsupialia: Peramelidae), Uinba, Kubor Range, P.N.G., 19.vi.1963, W. B. Hitcheock. Holotype in Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra ; paratype in author’s Institute. Female. Basis capituli (Fig. 2) longer than wide, with setae c reaching well | beyond its sides. Deutosternum with six rows of multiple denticles. Hypostome with setae h,>h,>h,. Labial cornicles small, but fully formed. Labrum narrow, tapered in distal third. Epistome of uncertain outline, but with dendritic * Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Brisbane, Queensland 4006. PROCEEDINGS ‘OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Soutm Watss, Vot. 101, Part. 4 186 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 submarginal texture as in Haemolaelaps calypso Domrow, 1966a. Palpi (trochanter-tibia) holotrichous ; seta al, on genu blunt. Tarsus shown dia- grammatically ; claw bifid. Chelicerae slender, but fully formed. Movable digit bidentate, apart from tip. Fixed digit edentate, slightly shorter than slender pilus dentilis. Corona weak ; setule and pore present. Idiosoma 765 long when figured, but now 735 due to resumption of more normal contours by well sclerotized body in semiliquid medium. Second specimen with teratological opisthosoma; length unavailable. Dorsal shield holotrichous, similar to that of A. aegleis Domrow, 1972, with two exceptions. Firstly, on podonotum, some discal setae (j,_, and z;) are relatively shorter, 1 Figs 1-2. Andreacarus balanites. 1, Idiosoma in ventral view, 2. 2, Capitulum in ventra view, with true right palp shown dorsally, 9. with interval between j, and j;, and between z, and j,, at least twice as long as setae concerned. Secondly, on opisthonotum, some submarginal setae (Z,_,) are relatively longer, each extending well beyond body margin and base of succeeding S seta (S,_., 4_5). Sternal shield angularly biconvex anteriorly (Fig. 1), and slightly (but irregularly) concave posteriorly; surface reticulate, except midposteriorly. Genitoventral shield with two pairs of usurped ventral setae ; third pair free in cuticle near posterolateral angles of shield. Anal shield discrete, but closely applied to genitoventral shield ; anus placed slightly behind centre of shield. Postanal seta considerably longer than distance between its insertion and anus, and extending beyond body margin. Cuticle with about 56 setae; extreme eet pair not decidedly longer than remainder. Venter otherwise as in . aegleis. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or New SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 187 Seta al on trochanter II spur-like. Anterior seta on coxae II-III expanded, hyaline in distal third. Legs otherwise as in A. aegleis, holotrichous, and with setae frequently barbulate (particularly on dorsal surface). Notes. The new species of Andreacarus described above is the first member of the radfordi species-group to be described from New Guinea, the three previously known species all being Australian (Domrow, 1963a, 1972). The new species is near A. aegleis, but separable by the setational differences on the dorsal and anal shields, ventral cuticle, and trochanter II mentioned in the description. The chelicerae provide a further distinction : the digits occupy 17 % of the total length in the new species, but only 4-5% in A. aeglets. The specific name is a Greek adjective (balanites, acorn-shaped), and refers to the modified anterior seta on coxae II-III. Andreacarus radfordi Domrow A. radfordi Domrow, 1963, J. Entomol. Soc. Queensl., 2: 9. Material. Four 929 from quoll, Dasyurus viverrinus (Shaw) (=D. quoll ea (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae), Golconda, Tas., 6.iv.1973, R. H. reen. One 2 from water rat, Hydromys chrysogaster Geoffroy (Rodentia : Muridae), Nile, Tas., 8.1.1974, R.H.G. Notes. The first series confirms the original record ; the second is a new host-record. Genus GYMNOLAELAPS Berlese Gymnolaelaps Berlese, 1916, Redia,12:170. Type-species Laelaps myrmeco- philus Berlese, 1892. Gymnolaelaps annectans Womersley G. annectans Womersley, 1955, Aust. J. Zool., 3: 419. Material. Two 29 from nest of short-tailed shearwater, Puffinus tenwirostris (Temminck) (Procellariiformes: Procellariidae), Maatsuyker Island, Tas., 28.1.1975, N. Brothers. Notes. This confirms the original record. Genus LAELAPSELLA Womersley Laelapsella Womersley, 1955, Aust. J. Zool., 3: 416. Type-species L. humi Womersley, 1955. Laelapsella humi Womersley (Fig. 11) L. humi Womersley, 1955, Aust. J. Zool., 3: 417. New host-record. Twenty-three 99, Hydromys chrysogaster, Nile, Tas., 8.1.1974, R.H.G. Female. Expistome sinuous, spiculate, drawn out medially (Fig. 11). Genus MESOLAELAPS Hirst Mesolaelaps Hirst, 1926, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1926 : 840. Type-species Laelaps (M.) anomalus Hirst, 1926. Mesolaelaps bandicoota (Womersley) (Figs 3-4) Hypoaspis bandicoota Womersley, 1956, J. Linn. Soc., 42 : 573. Material. One @ from brindled bandicoot, Isoodon macrourus (Gould) (Marsupialia: Peramelidae), Nambour, S.E.Q., 10.vili.1962, D. Agnew. Two 2° from long-nosed bandicoot, Perameles nasuta Geoffroy (Peramelidae), Raven- PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocinTy or New South Wates, Vou. 101, Part 4 188 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 shoe, N.Q., 6.111963, G. J. Barrow. Two 29, P. nasuta, Nambour, 10.viii.1962, D.A. Twelve ORs nasuta, Canungra (470 m), S. EH. Q., lil and x.1971, ‘R. Domrow and R. W. Campbell. - . One @ from dusky antechinus, — Antechinus swainsonit = (Waterhouse) (Dasyuridae), Parker River Cove, Vic., 21.vi.1975, J. Wainer. ght .-. One @ from southern bush-rat, ” Rattus fuscipes (Waterhouse) (Muridae), Palmerston, N.Q., 5.i1.1964, G.J.B. Two 929, R. fuscipes, Kirrama, N.Q,, 26.vill.1971, W. Dowd. Thirty- -five oo Rk. fuscipes, Canungra (470 m),, iii and x.1971,. R. Dy and R.W.C. Seven 99, R. fuscipes, Pearl Beach, N.S.W., 4 and Figs 3-4. Mesolaelaps bandicoota. Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, 2 var. 16.iv, 6.v, 27.vii, and 20.viii.1955, B. E. Horner and J. M. Taylor. One Q, R. fuscipes, 10 miles NW of Portland, Vic., 5.x.1963, B.H.H. and J.M.T. Seven 29, R. fuscipes, Loch Valley, Vic., 19—22.i11.1963, R. M. Warneke. One 2 from eastern swamp-rat, Rattus lutreolus (Gray), Mount Nebo, S.E.Q., 12.xi.1964, K. H. Derrick. One 9, Hydromys chrysogaster, Tully Falls, N. Q, 16.11.1965, G.J.B. Notes. The four specimens from Ravenshoe, Palmerston, and Tully Falls in north Queensland are those noted briefly by Domrow (1967). Re-examination of these specimens shows that the anterior seta on coxae II-III is spatulate in the three specimens from P. nasuta and R. fuscipes, but unmodified in the one specimen from H. chrysogaster. The two additional specimens from north Queensland (Kirrama) now recorded (Figs. 3-4) also show this modification. A second peculiarity of these six specimens is regular hypertrichy on. the ‘dorsal shield, all showing, instead of the usual four setae at positions J s- a Me -follewing counts : ‘5 once (Hydromys), 6 once, 7 twice, and 8 twice. | ' “PRocEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOctETY or NEW SourH Wars, Vor. 101; Part ‘4 R. DOMROW : 189: _.. M. bandicoota is commoner in coastal S.E. Australia, but the many specimens from southern localities listed above (and from Tasmania by Domrow, 1963), 1973) never show the anterior seta on coxae II-III modified, and only two specimens (one each from FR. fuscipes at Canungra and near Portland) show light hypertrichy at J,_, (5 and 6 setae, respectively). Thus hypertrichy at J,_, seems to be correlated with a modified anterior seta on coxae II-III, and the two modifications together with latitude. Nevertheless, considering the wider setal variation in M. sminthopsis (Womersley) (see Domrow, 1963b), even with its restricted host-range (small dasyurids only), I will not name the northern population of M. bandicoota. Lastly, the insertions of one or even two pairs of ventral setae not uncommonly touch upon the genital shield; and, in some specimens from Canungra, the posterior margin of the sternal shield is straight or even slightly convex (normally slightly concave). A. swainsonii is a new host-record. Figs 5-8. Mesolaelaps anomalus. 5-6, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, 2 var. 7, Peritreme, ? typ. 8, Peritreme, 2 var. Fig. 9. Mesolaelaps antipodianus. Epistome, deutonymph. Fig. 10. Haemolaelaps flagellatus. Epistome, 9. Fig. 11. Laelapsella humi. Epistome, 9. Mesolaelaps anomalus (Hirst) (Figs 5-8) ; I. (M.) anomalus Hirst, 1926, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1926 : 840. Material. Six 99, Peroryctes longicauda, Uinba, Kubor Range, P.N.G., 19.vi.1963, W.B.H. One @ from bandicoot, Hchymipera kalubu (Lesson) (Peramelidae), Upau River, Maprik, P.N.G., 28.xi.1962, K. Keith. Four 99, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety oF New SoutH WALES, VOL. 101, Part 4 190 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 HE. kalubu, Kaminibus, 5 km W of Maprik, 7.vi.1963, K.K. Two 99, #. kalubu, Avatip, Sepik River, P.N.G., 13.vi.1963, K.K. Notes. Apart frm twoo of the females from Uinba noted below, this material is typical of Tenorio and Radovsky’s (1974) illustrations, except that (1) the peritremes, rather than extending almost to setae z, on the dorsal shield, terminate at the level of mid-coxae I ; and (2) the peristigmatic portion of the peritrematal shields is usually, but not always (Fig. 7), narrowly continuous externally with the isolated forward lozenge shown by these authors. This blurs the distinction between M. anomalus and M. expansus Tenorio and Radovsky, and the two females from Uinba noted above are therefore assigned to the older taxon, a - choice further supported by the shape of the sternal and anal shields (Fig. 6). They also show extensive peritrematal shields (Fig. 8), but are a third as large again (Fig. 5) as typical M. anomalus (dorsal shield 1,365 x 835 vs 960 x 620), while the second pair of usurped ventral setae on the genitoventral shield is set nearly as far apart as the first pair, and well forward of the posterior margin. The first series is a new host-record ; the others confirm Domrow (1958)- Figs 12-13. Mesolaelaps antipodianus. Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, deutonymph. Mesolaelaps antipodianus (Hirst) (Figs 9, 12-13) L. (Heterolaelaps) antipodiana Hirst, 1926, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1926 : 838. Material. Thirteen 99 and one deutonymph from Gunn’s bandicoot, Perameles gunnit Gray, Maria Island, Tas., 8.iv.197 4, B. L. Munday. Deutonymph. Capitulum 290 long; single specimen available not ideally displayed for illustration, but structure clear and closely resembling that of 9 of M. aecessorius Tenorio and Radovsky, 1974, except in following points. Slightly PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy or New SourH WALES, Vout. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 191 more delicate because of immaturity. Basis capituli not so distinctly patterned, with setae ¢ and h, barely reaching its sides. Epistome (Fig. 9) more strongly dentate, but not as strongly so as in 9 of its own species (Tenorio and Radovsky, 1974). Palpal trochanter apparently unarmed ventrally. Setae al,_, on genu distinctly spatulate. Tarsal claw unenveloped. Chelicerae 180 long, with digits barely occupying 20% of total length. Idiosoma 750 long, 545 wide (maximum). Dorsal shield (Fig. 12) relatively elongate, 730 x 420, with only slight lateral incisions marking off podonotal and opisthonotal halves ; holotrichous, with 39 pairs of setae elearly arranged even marginally, where only one seta has been usurped from hypertrichous cuticle. Setae Z;_, and S, larger than remainder on opisthonotal half. Anterior-most pair of setae on cuticle considerably longer than remainder. Tritosternum undistinguished (Fig. 13); base not clearly spinulose near origins of laciniae. Sternal shield elongate, merging indistinctly along anterior margin with presternal striae ; entire surface reticulate ; with four pairs of setae (first pair of sternal setae slightly barbulate) and three pairs of pores. Pregenital setae free in cuticle ; one accompanying pore apparently in form of minute seta. Anal shield rounded anteriorly, with anus set forward of centre. Adanal setae barely reaching insertion of longer postanal seta. Metapodal shields not detected. Endopodal shields III small; [V more extensive, apparently confluent (at least subcuticularly) with exopodal shields IV. Cuticle hypertrichous, with longer setae midventrally between sternal and anal shields (four pairs) and posteriorly (one pair exceptionally so). -Peritremes reaching forward to level of anterior margins of coxae II ; poststigmatic portion of peritrematal shields free in cuticle. Legs holotrichous, except tibia I, which bears one additional v seta, being (2-6/4—2) rather than (2—6/3—2).* Some setae on leg IV (especially dorsally on tarsus) longer, up to 165. Mesolaelaps sminthopsis (Womersley) (Figs 14-22) LL. (L.) sminthopsis Womersley, 1954, Rec. South Aust. Mus., 11 : 117. Material. One deutonymph from yellow-footed antechinus, Antechinus flavipes (Waterhouse),+ Crawford’s Lookout, Palmerston National Park, Qld, 17.11.1959, R. D. and J. L. Harrison. One 3, A. flavipes, Landsborough, Vic., 17.vii.1962, R.M.W. Two g¢ from brown antechinus, A. stuartii Macleay, Tully Falls, Qld, 16.11.1965, G.J.B. Two gd, A. stuartiit, Mount Clay, Heathmere Vic., 10.1.1962, R.M.W. One protonymph, A. stwartii, Sherbrooke Forest, Vic., 4.vi.1973, I. Beveridge. One J, one protonymph (enclosing deutonymph), and two larvae, A. stuartii, Powelltown, Vic., vii—viii.1973, I.B. Six 99, A. swainsonii, Powelltown, Vic., 5.iii.1974, I.B. One deutonymph from fat-tailed dunnart, Sminthopsis crassicaudata (Gould) (Dasyuridae) (laboratory colony), Melbourne, Vic., 20.v.1962, R.M.W. One deutonymph from nesting material of Leadbeater’s possum, Gymnobelideus leadbeateri McCoy (Marsupialia : Petauridae), Loch Valley, Vic., 29.vii.1963, R.M.W. Female. Dorsal shield holotrichous (Fig. 14). Male. Capitulum 265-285 long, basis 105-130 wide at midlength. Setation on basis and palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous. Setae al,_, on genu clavate. » Epistome ligulate, minutely serrate (Fig. 18). Chelicerae 195-210 long overall. Fixed digit slender, edentate, and provided with short pilus dentilis. Movable * The female also shows this additional v seta on tibia I. + See Domrow (1962, 1967) on this identification. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 4 492 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 digit also edentate, largely obscured by spermatophore-carrier ; latter strongly attenuate at tip. Cheliceral setule, pore, and corona present. Tdiosoma 590-750 long, 305-505 wide at level of coxae III. Dorsal shield holotrichous (Fig. 16), with 39 pairs of setae reasonably clearly arranged except marginally, where hypertrichy occurs due to lateral expansion of shield to take in most of setae (about 60 pairs, of which. one or two may encroach beyond S series) present on cuticle in 2 and deutonymph. Setae Z, enlarged. Surface of Figs 14-15. Mesolaelaps sminthopsis. 14, Dorsal shield, 9. 15, Idiosoma in ventral view, deutonymph. shield reticulate (but not so illustrated), and with all 22 pairs of pores shown by Evans and Till (1965), except pair in front of setae j;, Marginal cuticle with 30-35 pairs of setae. _ Tritosternum 135 long, undistinguished (Fig. 17). Holoventral shield reticulate and entire, but ventral portion with fenestrations and irregular margin. Sternal, metasternal, and genital setae and pores in standard arrangement ; about eight pairs of usurped ventral setae present. Anal shield discrete, elongate, with three subequal anal setae ; anus set well forward between adanal setae. Cribrum present. Metapodal shields present. Ventral cuticle with 45-50 pairs of setae. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF New SoutH WAatEs, Vou. 101, Part 4 193 R. DOMROW ven ; nal view, with inset of movable digit in internal view, <3. al views, protonymph (containing developing deutonymph, al and ventr: dors Figs 16-20. Mesolaelaps sminthopsis. 16-17, Idiosoma in dorsal and : ame and partly reconstructed). 18, Epistome and right chelicera in exter: 19-20, Idiosoma in Wa tes, Vou. 101, Part 4 THE LINNEAN SooIlETY oF NEw SoutTH DINGS OF PROCEE 194 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 Peritremes extending forward to level of mid-coxae II; peristigmatic shields present (though not clear in specimen illustrated, peritrematal shields narrowly joined to humeral portions of dorsal shield). Legs holotrichous, except tibia I, which bears one additional v seta, being (2-6/4—2) rather than (2—6/3—2).* Deutonymph. Capitulum 255-295 long, basis 135-165 wide. Basis with setae c slender, barbulate, reaching well beyond its sides. Hypostome with setae h,_, also barbulate, but h, apparently simple. Deutosternum with about Figs 21-22. Mesolaelaps sminthopsis. Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, larva. seven rows of one to four denticles. Palpi holotrichous (tarsal details not clear), with only seta v, on trochanter and dorsal setae on femur and genu clearly barbulate ; seta al, on genu blunt. Chelicerae as in 9. Dorsal shield 715-740 long, 310-330 wide (maximum) ; similar to that of 3, with setae Z, enlarged, holotrichous, but not taking in setae from hypertrichous dorsal cuticle ; apparently unincised laterally. Tritosternal base (Fig. 15) slightly enlarged before division into laciniae (Tenorio and Radovsky, 1974). Sternal shield elongate, narrowed between coxae IV, and carrying four pairs of setae and three pairs of submarginal pores ; surface reticulate, but not so figured. Pregenital setae and pores free in cuticle. Anal shield roundly elongate, with adanal setae set near middle of anus and extending well beyond insertion of stronger postanal seta; cribrum present. * The female also shows this additional v seta on tibia I. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or NEw SoutH Wats, VoL. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 195 Metapodal and exopodal shields IV present. Ventral cuticle hypertrichous. Peritremes somewhat abbreviated, extending only to mid-coxae II; without distinct poststigmatic shields. Leg setation not entirely clear, but probably largely holotrichous ; crucial segments (tibia I and genu IV) certainly (2-6/4—2) and (2—5/1-1), respectively. Protonymph. Capitulum 280-295 long, basis 130-140 wide at midlength. Setation on basis and palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous. Seta al, on genu clavate. Otherwise as in 9. Idiosoma 705 long, 525 wide (enclosing developing deutonymph). Dorsal Shields (Fig. 19) holotrichous (30 pairs of setae). Pygidial shield with one pair of pronounced pores. Tritosternum (Fig. 20) 120 long, undistinguished. Outline of sternal shield not clear ; three pairs of sternal setae present, but two pairs of pores not detected. Metasternal complex lacking. Pregenital setae apparently absent. Outline of anal shield not clear, but cribrum present. Anus set between adanal setae, which are subequal to postanal seta. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae (first pair Subequal to next two pairs, posteriormost pair elongate). Peritremes above coxae III, lacking peristigmatic shields, but with elongate peritrematal shields. Legs holotrichous. Larva. Capitulum 270-280 long; basis 128-133 wide at midlength. Setation on basis and palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous. Seta al, on genu clavate. Otherwise essentially as in 9. Idiosoma 310-315 long, 210 wide at level of coxae III. Dorsal shields lacking (Fig. 21), but podonotum holotrichous (10 pairs of setae). Opisthonotum with seven pairs of setae (one pair short, six pairs elongate), and one pair of pronounced pores. Tritosternum 116-124 long, undistinguished (Fig. 22). Three pairs of sternal setae present, but shield and pores lacking. Metasternal complex lacking. Outline of anal shield not clear; adanal setae set at level of anus, subequal to postanal seta. Ventral cuticle with five pairs of setae (first pair minute, posteriormost pair elongate). Stigmata and peritremes lacking. Legs holotrichous. — Notes. All stages of this interesting species are now known. It infests a variety of small dasyurid marsupials in eastern Australia, A. swainsoniw being a new host-record. . Genus HAEMOLAELAPS Berlese Haemolaelaps Berlese, 1910, Redia, 6: 261. Type-species Laelaps (H.) marsupialis Berlese, 1910. Haemolaelaps pachyptilae Zumpt and Till (Figs 23-26) H. pachyptilae Zumpt and Till, 1956, Z. Parasitenkd, 17 : 285. New host-records. One ¢ from nest of fairy penguin, Hudyptula minor (Forster) (Sphenisciformes : Spheniscidae), Maatsuyker Island, Tas., 29.1.1975, N.B. Ten 99, two gg, and one deutonymph from nests of Puffinus tenuirosiris, same data, but19 and 28.1.1975. Six 99 and two deutonymphs from nests of fairy prion, Pachyptila turtur (Kuhl) (Procellariidae), same data, but 19, 25, and 28.1.1975. Two 929 from nest of diving petrel, Pelecanoides urinatrix (Gmelin) (Procellariiformes : Pelecanoididae), same data, but 29.1.1975. Male. Capitulum essentially as in 9, 250-255 long, basis 95 wide. Capitular and hypestomatal setae rather shorter and stouter than in 9, ¢ and h, barely exceeding sides of basis. Palpi holotrichous, again with setae rather stouter than PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTY or NEw SoutH Watss, Vout. 101, Part 4 196 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 Figs 23-26. Haemolaelaps pachyptilae. 23-24, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, 3. 25-26, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, deutonymph. aGNA PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEw SoutH WatEs, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 197 in 9.. Setae al,, on genu spatulate. Chelicerae 200 long, not well orientated in available specimens, but typical of genus. Fixed digit reduced, narrow, and edentate, but with pilus dentilis in full 9 form. Movable digit also edentate, barely reaching half-way along, and largely obliterated by, curved spermatophore- carrier (latter occupying almost 45° of total cheliceral length). Corona present. Epistome hyaline, rounded, reaching almost to apices of palpal femora. Dorsal shield 615-635 x 405-415, parallel-sided, broadly rounded posteriorly, and covering all of dorsum except for narrowest marginal strip of cuticle (Fig. 23). Shield essentially holotrichous (39 pairs of setae), with same 11 pairs of discals (ja-6) 25-6) Jia) 2nd px,_3) short as in 9; marginals elongate (except j,, 2, 51, and J,), sinuous, but possibly so, at least in part, as artifact of mounting. Two specimens show slight hypertrichy at J, (3 and 4 setae, not usual 2 as in third specimen*) ; specimen illustrated also lacks z, on one side. Surface of shield reticulate, with distinct muscle insertions and numerous paired pores. Marginal cuticle with up to four pairs of setae. Tritosternum (Fig. 24) 150 long, base unarmed, 22 long; laciniae divided almost to base, lightly ciliated. Presternal area striate. Sternal, metasternal, genital, and ventral shields fused and well sclerotized with distinct intercoxal projections, especially between coxae I-II. Surface neatly reticulate, with usual five pairs of setae and four pairs of pores in addition to transverse row of four usurped ventral setae. Anal shield broad, rounded anteriorly, and with distinct cribrum. Anus centrally placed, flanked by adanal setae that are rather shorter than postanal seta. Metapodal shields rather variable in shape, elongate-oval to rounded, set outside pair of narrow, transverse shieldlets ; ventral cuticle also with evenly arranged, and still smaller, plaques and pores. Cuticle also with four setae in transverse row between ventral and anal shield (of these, 0, 1, or 2 of central pair may be usurped by ventral shield), one short and one long pair of setae flanking anal shield, and (at times) one pair of setae in continuation of row on dorsal cuticle. Peritremes slender, reaching forward to mid-coxae I; post- stigmatic portion of peritrematal shields elongate, with small pore, but free of exopodal shields IV. Even leg I slightly thickened, [I-IV markedly so. Setation holotrichous, except for genu IV, which bears one additional pl seta, being 2—5/1-2 rather than 2—5/1-1. Some d setae elongate ; some v setae spinose. Deutonymph. Capitulum essentially as in 9, 235-245 95-105 in two younger, unexpanded specimens, 250 x 110 in expanded specimen. Dorsum (Fig. 25) predicting form in ¢; dorsal shield incised laterally, 540-550 x 340-365 in two unexpanded specimens, 585 x 380 in expanded specimen. Setation holotrichous, but J, displaced in one specimen. Tritosternum and presternal area (Fig. 26) as in g. Sternal shield 270-275 long (from setae st,), 110-120 wide (between st.) in two unexpanded specimens, 290 x 125 in expanded specimen. Anterior margin of shield straight, but weakly defined ; lateral margins parallel between coxae II, tapered between coxae III-IV. Surface barely reticulate, with usual four pairs of setae and three pairs of pores. Pregenital setae and pores free in cuticle. Anal and metapodal shields as in d. Ventral cuticle with five pairs of setae between sternal and anal shields, one short and one long pair of setae flanking anal shield, and about nine pairs of short setae marginally. Peritremes as in g, but peristigmatic portion of peritrematal shields not extended posteriorly to take in pore. Legs essentially as in 9, 7.e. holotrichous, except for one additional pl seta on genu IV ; no d setae unduly long; no v setae unduly spinose. nn * Five of 10 females examined also show 3 setae at J,; the other five show 2. ‘PROCEEDINGS’ or THH “LINNEAN SocirmrTy or New Sout Watzs. Vou. 101, Part 4 198 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 Notes. This is a considerable extension of range, the only previous record having been from the dove-prion, Pachyptila desolata (Gmelin), on Heard Island. The male and deutonymph were previously unknown. The male of H. pachyptilae shows a discrete anal shield as in H. centrocarpus Berlese, H. hirsti Keegan, etc., but can be readily separated by the marked disparity of the discal and marginal setae on the dorsal shield. In other congeners, the anal shield is confluent with the ventral shield, the combined holoventral shield behind coxae IV being either unexpanded (e.g. H. mesopicos Radford) or expanded (e.g. H. murinus (Berlese)). See Till (1963). In some dermanyssid species (e.g. Laelaps rothschildi Hirst below), I suggest that larger deutonymphs are prefemale and smaller ones premale, but the situation is not so simple here, since the deutonymphs described show a mixture of form, their capitulum and legs predicting those of the female, but their dorsal Shield that of the male. Thus, I cannot say if the two size ranges noted above are due merely to age or to sex, but I note that while the dorsal shield of one unexpanded female measures only 645x405, it runs to 670-700 x 430-460 in five older, fed, yet not unduly compressed, females. This material prompted me to re-examine the specimens associated with E. minor, P. tenuirostris, and P. turtur, and identified as H. fahrenholzi (Berlese) (=H. glasgowi (Ewing) fide Evans and Till, 1966) by Womersley (1955) and Domrow (1973). I confirm that they key out to, and agree closely with, H. glasgowi as redescribed by Till (1963), including a similar degree of hypertrichy at setae J,_, (7-8 setae) and subequal cheliceral digits. The redescription given by Evans and Till (1966) varies somewhat from that of Till (1963), but Tipton, Altman, and Keenan (1966) recognize an even wider range of infraspecific variation. Genu IV bears an additional pl seta in all stages present (female, deutonymph, protonymph). Haemolaelaps flagellatus Womersley (Fig. 10) H. flagellata Womersley, 1958, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 82 : 300. Material. Seventeen 29 from nests of Hudyptula minor, Maatsuyker Island, Tas., 29.1.1975, N.B. Seven 29° from nests of Puffinus tenuirostris, same data, but 16 and 19.1.1975. Three 99 from nests of Pachyptila turtur, same data, but 25 and 28.1.1975. Four 9° from Tasmanian devil, Sarcophilus harrisii (Boitard) (Dasyuridae), Magg’s Mountain, Tas., 14.xi.1974, R.H.G. Female. Epistome rounded, minutely denticulate (Fig. 10). Notes. The specimens from Puffinus confirm the original record ; the others. are new host-records. Haemolaelaps telemachus Domrow (Figs 27-30) H. telemachus Domrow, 1964, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 89 : 160. Material. Several collections comprising numerous adults of both sexes, two deutonymphs, four protonymphs, and two larvae (each enclosing a developing protonymph), Antechinus stuartii, Powelltown, Vic., vii—viii.1973, I.B. Protonymph. Capitulum 150-162 long; basis 77-87 wide at midlength. Setation on basis and palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous. Seta v, on trochanter simple ; seta al, on genu blunt. Otherwise essentially as in 9. __Idiosoma 390-450 long, 263-312 wide (excluding peritremes). Dorsal Shields (Fig. 27) holotrichous (30 pairs of setae). Pygidial shield with two. pronounced pores. Tritosternum 93-106 long, undistinguished (Fig. 28). Sternal shield 162-177 long, 95-110 wide at second pair of sternal setae ; biconvex anteriorly, eroded PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or New Sours Wats, Vor. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 199 laterally, and subtriangular posteriorly ; virtually textureless, with three pairs of short sternal setae and two pairs of pores. Metasternal complex lacking. Pregenital setae minute. Anal shield 57-64 long, 92-96 wide, with anterior margin almost straight ; anus centrally placed, about as long as adanal setae. 28 Figs 27-30. Haemolaelaps telemachus. 27-28, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, protonymph. 29-30, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, larva. Postanal seta longer ; cribrum present. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae (posteriormost pair weakly barbed). -Peritremes above coxae III, lacking peristigmatic shields. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WatEs, Vou. 101, Part 4 200 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 se holotrichous, except genu a which bears one additional pl seta, being (1-4/0-1) rather than (1-4/0-0).* Only seta al on coxae II-III clearly expanded and hyaline. Seta d on trochanter IV and 2.2.1.2 d setae on femora bifid at tip (Domrow, 1961).+ Larva. Capitulum 168 long ; basis 80 wide at midlength. Setation on basis and palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous. Seta al, on genu blunt. Otherwise essentially as in 9. Idiosoma 420 long, 310 wide at level of coxae III (Fig. 29). Dorsal shield not detected, but podonotum holotrichous (10 pairs of setae). Opisthonotum with five pairs of clavate setae and several pronounced pores. Tritosternum 72 long, undistinguished (Fig. 30). Three pairs of sternal setae present, but shield and pores not detected. Metasternal complex absent. Anal shield as in protonymph, but less markedly wider than long; length 72, width 88. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae (first pair minute, posterior- most two pairs clavate). Stigmata and peritremes lacking. Legs holotrichous. Seta al coxae II-III not expanded and hyline. No d setae on femora bifid at tips. Notes. All stages of this interesting species are now known ; its only known hosts are species of Antechinus Macleay in mainland 8.H. Australia. Genus ANDROLAELAPS Berlese Androlaelaps Berlese, 1903, Zool. Anz., 27 : 14. Type-species Laelaps (Iphis) hermaphrodita Berlese, 1887. Androlaelaps hermaphroditus (Berlese) L. (I.) hermaphrodita Berlese, 1887, Acari, Myriapoda et Scorpiones hucusque in Italia reperta, 40:6. Padua. Material. Numerous adults (both sexes) associated with cattle ticks, Boophilus microplus (Canestrini) (Acari: Ixodidae), ovipositing in the field at Amberley, Qld, 1973, J. W. Newman. Notes. This widespread predator is not uncommon on small mammals (Womersley, 1956 ; Wilson, 1967), but has not previously been recorded from Australia. Genus LAELAPS Koch Laelaps Koch, 1836, Deutschlands Crustaceen, Myriapoden und Arachniden, 4:19. Regensburg: Herrich-Schaffer. Type-species L. hilaris Koch, 1836. Laelaps nuttalla Hirst L. nutiallt Hirst, 1915, Bull. Entomol. Res., 6 : 183. Material ecamined. Two gg from rat, Rattus ruber (Jentink), Korogo, Sepik River, P.N.G., 10.11.1964, K.K. Three 99, Rattus (?) ruber, near Rauit Village (3°36'S, 142°15’E), P.N.G., 1973, Aberdeen University New Guinea Expedition. Sixteen 99, 11 gg, and four protonymphs from rat, Melomys platyops (Thomas) (Muridae), Maprik, P.N.G., 24—27.i1.1964, K.K. Two 929, Melomys rufescens (Alston), Maprik, 25.v.1963, K.K. Three 99, Melomys littoralis (Lénnberg), Mossman Gorge, N.Q., 9.vii.1964, K.K. Notes. All specimens run through Allred’s (1969) keys. The two New Guinea species of Melomys Thomas are unrecorded hosts. * The deutonymph and adult also show an MGRNGaE pl seta on genu IV, being (2-5/1—2) rather than (2—5/1-1). { The deutonymph and adult also show this pattern, and my original statement is in error— it is not until an ideal plane is assumed that the bifid tip of these setae is at all clear. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LiINNEAN SocrETY.oF New SoutH Watzs, Vot..101, Part 4 ’ R. DOMROW 201 Laelaps assimilis Womersley (Figs 31-43) L. assimilis Womersley, 1956, J. Linn. Soc., 42 : 557. Material. Five °° and one 3, Rattus fuscipes, Shipwreck Creek, Vic., 12.11.1969, J. H. Seebeck. Five 2° and one 4, R. fuscipes, 32 km S of Albany, W.A., 22.x.1970, J. Martin. Four 29, two deutonymphs, three protonymphs, and two larvae, Rattus lutreolus, Wilson’s Promontory, Vic., 7.v.1973, R. Shepherd. Female. Deutosternum (Fig. 41) with six rows of denticles, mostly double. Hypostome with setae h,=h,>h,. Labial cornicles small, barely horn-like. Salivary stylets present. Labrum subacute. Epistome trilobed, not dentate, and falling short of distal margins of palpal femora. Palpi (trochanter-tibia) holotrichous. Seta v, on trochanter slightly bladed (if seen from suitable angle). Pilus dentilis inflated distally (Fig. 43). Dorsal shield (Fig. 31) holotrichous (39 pairs of setae, seta J, missing on one side of specimen figured).* Anal shield (Fig. 32) distinctly longer than wide, with adanal setae barely reaching half way from their insertions to that of postanal seta. EHxopodal shields IV and poststigmatic shields present. Coxa II with small spine on anterodorsal margin. Leg setation holotrichous, except that genu IV has one additional pl seta, being (2—5/1-2) rather than (2—5/1-1). Femora I-II with two dorsodistal setae much strengthened ; genu I with seta pd, strong. Generally speaking, setae set ventrally on distal segments of legs II-IV are stronger, but only al, and pl, on tarsus II, and al, (and perhaps al.) on tarsus III, may be termed spurs. Male. Capitulum essentially as in 2, except for chelicerae (Fig. 42). Dorsal shield (Fig. 35) as in 2 (setae r, and S, missing each on one side of specimen figured), but with longer marginal setae (r,_;, $., S,;_s, Zs). Venter essentially as in 9, except for details of holoventral shield (Fig. 36). Setal formulae for legs, including genu IV, as in 9. Setae al,, av,, pl,, avs, and pv, clearly spurs on tarsi II-III. Setae al,, av,, pv,, pl,, pv, and pl, clearly spurs on tarsus IV. Deutonymph. Capitulum, dorsum, and venter essentially as in 9, except for lateral incisions on dorsal shield (Fig. 33), details of sternal shield (Fig. 34), and absence of poststigmatic shields. Legs also as in 9, including genu IV. Protonymph. Capitulum and legs holotrichous, except for additional pl seta on genu IV (as in Haemolaelaps telemachus above). Dorsum (Fig. 37) holotrichous (30 pairs of setae). Posterior margin of podonotal shield straight. Pygidial shield transversely oval, with slight convexity on midanterior margin. Sternal shield (Fig. 38) longer than wide, somewhat irregular in outline posteriorly ; with three pairs of setae and two pairs of submarginal pores. Pregenital setae small. Anal shield not as elongate as in 9, but with adanal setae relatively larger compared to postanal seta. Metapodal shields not detected, but indications of exopodal shields IV present. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae. Peritremes above coxae III, preceded by anterolateral precursor of peritrematal shields. Larva. Capitulum and legs holotrichous. * The original illustration also shows 39 pairs, but makes good the omission of z, by mistaking the distinct pores outside j, for an additional pair of setal alveoli. It is sobering to look back, after 20 years, at one’s first attempt at scientific illustration, and I make no excuse for presenting supplementary Figs. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy or NEw SoutH WatsEs, Vou. 101, Part 4 TES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MI 203 37-38, al views, ¢. 1 views, p ymph. _ Figs 35-38. Laelaps assimilis. 35-36, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventr r Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, proton LINNEAN SOCIETY OF 204. LAEHLAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 39 NG ' es Figs 39-43. Laelaps assimilis. 39-40, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, larva. 41, : Capitulum in ventral view, with true right palp shown dorsally and inset of tip of epistome, Q- 42, Chelicera in lateral view, g. 43, Chelicera in dorsoexternal view (above) and external view (below), 9. _ Figs 44-45. Laelaps rothschildi. 44, Idiosoma in dorsal view, g. 45, Idiosoma in ventral view, prefemale deutonymph. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH Watss, Vout. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 205 Podonotum (Fig. 39) holotrichous (10 pairs of setae). Opisthonotum with four pairs of setae. Three pairs of sternal setae present (Fig. 40). Anal setae subequal. Ventral cuticle with three pairs of setae. Notes. All stages of this common species are now known. Males vary considerably in dimensions, but without the clear-cut division into two size classes shown in L. dolomydis Mrciak, 1974. With the recognition that R. fuscipes occurs in Western Australia as well as in the eastern states (Horner and Taylor, 1965), the similar extension of range now recorded for L. assimilis is not surprising. 47 4 i is Figs 46-50. Laelaps rothschildi. 46, Idiosoma in ventral view, with inset of poststigmatic portion of peritrematal shield, g. 47-48, Femur-genu I in dorsal and ventral views, g. 49, Capitulum in ventral view, with true left palp shown dorsally, 3. 50, Left chelicera in ventral view, . Laelaps barbarae Strandtmann and Mitchell LI. (Hchinolaelaps) barbarae Strandtmann and Mitchell, 1963, Pacif. Insects, 5 : 558. New host-record. Eleven 99 from rat, Rattus verecundus (Thomas), Kairouk, Madang, P.N.G., vii.1968 and 1.1972, W. H. Ewers. Laelaps rothschildi Hirst (Figs 44-55) L. rothschildi Hirst, 1914, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 20 : 325. Material. Numerous 29, Melomys platyops, Maprik, P.N.G., 24—27.11.1964, K.K. Six 99, Melomys rufescens, Kaminibus, 3 miles W of Maprik, 25.v.1963, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTY oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vow. 101, Part 4 206 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 K.K. Nine 99, M. rufescens, Luk Luk Island, Chambri Lake, P.N.G., 30.v.1963, K.K. Four 99, M. rufescens, Japangai, Sepik River, P.N.G., 14.vi.1963, K.K. Five 99, M. rufescens, Bainyik, Sepik River, 22.11.1964, K.K. Four 29, Melomys littoralis, Capsize Creek, 80 km S of Moreton Telegraph Office, N.Q., 19.vii.1964, K.K. Several 29, M. littoralis, Shipton’s Flat, N.Q., 9 and 12.vii.1964, K.K. Four ¢¢ and one protonymph, Melomys sp., Cape Flattery, N of Coen, Qld, 30.xi.1970, J.M. Three deutonymphs and two protonymphs, Melomys sp., 32 km 8 of Townsville, Qld, 31.viii.1970, J.M. Figs 51-55. Laelaps rothschildi. 51-52, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, protonymph (right-hand side of podonotal shield reconstructed). 53-54, Leg II in dorsal and ventral views, g. 55, Epistome, ¢. : Male. Capitulum (Fig. 49) 300 long; basis 126 wide. Capitular setae weaker than all hypostomatal setae except h,. Deutosternum with six rows of denticles in small number. Labial cornicles distinct, but not strongly curved and horn-like. Labrum spatulate. Epistome diaphanous (Fig. 55), reaching forward to middle of palpal femora. Palpi (trochanter-tibia) holotrichous. Seta al, on genu spatulate. Claws bifid. Chelicerae 230 long (Fig. 50). Fixed digit obsolescent. Movable digit also weak and edentate, largely fused to, and almost obliterated by, strong, upwardly curved spermatophore-carrier. Corona present, but weak. Idiosoma 753 long, 500 wide. Dorsal shield (Fig. 44) oval, almost entirely covering dorsum ; surface reticulate. Shield essentially holotrichous (39 pairs of setae, 2, lacking on one side of specimen figured), but hypertrichous to extent of six to eight pairs of shorter setae apparently set on extreme margin. Dorsal cuticle accordingly with only about two pairs of setae. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 207 Holoventral shield typical of genus (Fig. 46), with posterolateral margins irregular and sometimes fenestrate ; normally with five pairs of usurped ventral setae (but 5-6 on specimen figured). Adanal setae set just behind anus, distinctly Shorter than other setae on shield. Exopodal shields IV typical of genus. Ventral cuticle with about 15 pairs of setae of increasing length posteriorly. Peritremes abbreviated, reaching only to mid-coxae II. Poststigmatic shields normally as figured on right-hand side; inset and left-hand side represent individual variations. Setation of legs holotrichous (Figs 53-54), with one exception, genu IV being (2—5/1-2) rather than (2—5/1-1).* Some d setae on femora-genua I-II slightly stronger (Figs 47-48). Deutonymph. Capitulum, including palpal trochanter-tibia holotrichous ; otherwise essentially as in &. Dorsum as in g, except for marginal hypertrichy on dorsal shield. Dorsal cuticle accordingly more setose than in g. Dorsal shield incised laterally, 990 long, 560 wide in one specimen (prefemale), 745-755 long, 440 wide in other two (premale). Sternal shield (Fig. 45) elongate, slightly narrower (and weakly defined) in posterior half ; surface reticulate ; bearing four pairs of setae and three pairs of pores on margin. Pregenital setae and pores free in cuticle. Anal shield sub- triangular, equilateral, with anus set slightly in front of centre. Adanal setae reaching insertion of stronger postanal seta ; cribrum present. Metapodal shields distinct, but exopodal shields IV only incipient. Ventral cuticle with about 10 pairs of setae of increasing length posteriorly. Peritremes reaching forward to mid-coxae I ; poststigmatic shields absent. Legs as in 3. Protonymph. Capitulum holotrichous (palpal tarsus not examined) ; other- wise essentially as in 2 (Domrow, 1973). Dorsum holotrichous (Fig. 51). Podonotal shield in specimen figured 450 long and calculated to be 375 wide ; opisthonotal shield 180 long, 312 wide. Sternal shield elongate (Fig. 52), almost textureless, bearing three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores marginally. Pregenital setae absent, but accompanying pores present. Anal shield more elongate than in deutonymph, but position of anus and proportions of anal setae as in that stage. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae, posteriormost pair much the strongest. Peritremes above coxae III, without associated shields. Setation of legs holotrichous, with one exception, genu IV being (1—4/0—1) rather than (1—4/0-0). Notes. The stages now described remove any doubt on the generic placement of this common parasite of mosaic-tailed rats. Only the larva remains unknown. M. platyops and M. rufescens are new host-records. Genus NEOLAELAPS Hirst Neolaelaps Hirst, 1926, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1926 : 836. Type-species Tiponyssus magnistigmatus Vitzthum, 1918. N eolaelaps palpispinosus Strandtmann and Garrett (Figs 56-64, 74-75) N. palpispinosus Strandtmann and Garrett, 1967, J. med. Ent., 4: 237. New host-record. Four 99 and two deutonymphs from tube-nosed bat, Nyctimene draconilla Thomas (Chiroptera: Pteropodidae), near Rauit Village, * The same is true of the female (Domrow, 1973). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Watess, Vou. 101, Part 4 208 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 West Sepik District, P.N.G., 10.viii.1973, Aberdeen University New Guinea Expedition. Female. Palpi (excluding tarsus) holotrichous, except for unideficient genu (al, lacking). Leg setation holotrichous (Figs 59-60), with four exceptions: genu I (Figs 61-62) unideficient ventrally (1.1, not 2.1); tibia I with additional seta ventrally (2.2, not 2.1; one specimen shows 1.2 on one side) ; tibia IV unideficient both Figs 56-64. Neolaelaps palpispinosus. 56-57, Podonotal half of dorsal shield, 9. 58. Podonotal half of dorsal shield, deutonymph. 59-60, Femur II in dorsal and ventral views, 9, 61-62, Femur-tibia I in dorsal and ventral views, 9. 63—64, Tarsus IV in dorsal and ventral views, @. dorsally and posteriorly (1.2-1 as on tibia III, not 1.3-2); basitarsus IV (Figs 63-64) unideficient (pd, lacking). Deutonymph. Capitulum with setae c, and palpal trochanter with seta %,, filamentous distally. Otherwise as in 2 gee 385-410 long, 255-260 wide at stigmata. Dorsal shield detailed in Notes. Sternal shield (Fig. 75) with four pairs of setae and two pairs of pores, well formed, but tapered posteriorly so that pregenital pair of setae and pores lie free in cuticle. Remainder of venter as in 9, but reticulations on shields less marked, ventral setae more numerous (about 25 pairs), and peritremes less abruptly attenuated distally. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw Soutu WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 : | R. DOMROW 209 Both setae on coxa I and posterior seta on coxa II filamentous distally. Setal formulae as in 9. Notes. The brief descriptive notes above on the female supplement the original text. Apart from minor individual variation, the formulae originally given for the leg setation seem to reflect two real omissions: al, and small d seta set anterobasally on femora I-II, and ad, and pd, (very fine, and often appressed to ambulacra) on tarsi II-IV. The formulae in the other two known species—V. vitezthumi Domrow and N. spinosus (Berlese) (see Radovsky, 1967)— are the same as in NV. palpispinosus, except that basitarsus IV is normal. More interesting is the setal pattern on the dorsal shield. The lateral incisions marking off the podonotal and opisthonotal halves of this shield in the deutonymph confirm one’s impression from the female that the opisthonotal setae comprise 15 pairs: J,_;, Z,_;, and S,_;, without accessory px. Little individual variation was noted, positions Z,_, and Z,_, being occupied by a single seta on one side of one deutonymph and one female, respectively. A careful count of the podonotal setae in two females showed 23 pairs arranged as in the left-hand side of both the original illustration and Fig. 57. The other two females showed 23.22, the deficiency being due to the absence of seta 2; in one case (Fig. 56), and seta aw in the other (Fig. 57). The original illustration, incidentally, is also 23.22, but a third seta (r,) is involved. Likewise, although one deutonymph shows 23.23, the count is better expressed 23.22 +1, since the absence of seta r, (Fig. 58) is made good only by the presence of an unpaired subvertical seta v in a position never occupied in females. The unevenness in the other deutonymph (23.23+1) is also due to an unpaired seta v (Fig. 74). Ignoring seta v as an individual variation, acceptance of the normal presence of an accessory seta ax (Fig. 57) in the position noted by Costa (see Evans and Till, 1965) in some more typical laelapine genera best fits the pattern of 23 (rather than the basic 22) pairs of podonotal setae in JN. palpispinosus. In the other two species of the genus, the hypertrichy is more extreme, despite the “ pressure ” exerted by the grossly enlarged peritremes nearby (Ww . vitazthumi 24-25 pairs, N. sprnosus about 26, see Domrow, 1961, and Radovsky, 1967). Genus DOMROWNYSSUS Evans and Till Domrownyssus Evans and Till, 1969, Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist., 14 : 121. Type-species Pneumonyssus dentatus Domrow, 1961. Domrownyssus dentatus (Domrow) P. dentatus Domrow, 1961, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 86: 73. New host-record. Numerous protonymphs, nasal cavities, Antechinus swainsonit, Kosciusko National Park, N.S.W., 12.vi.1975, D. M. Spratt, and Powelltown, Vic., 5.iii.1974, I.B. Genus TRICHOSUROLAELAPS Womersley Trichosurolaclaps Womersley, 1956, J. Linn. Soc., 42: 564. Type-species T. crassipes Womersley, 1956. Trichosurolaelaps bakert Mitchell and Strandtmann T. bakeri Mitchell and Strandtmann, 1964, J. Med. Entomol., 1 : 126. Material. Two 929 from bandicoot, Hchymipera rufescens (Peters and Doria), Yambi, 32 km S of Maprik, P.N.G., 23.v.1962, K.K. Notes. This confirms the original host, see Tenorio and Radovsky (1973).* * Presumably the confirmed host identification given by these authors for 7’. domrowi Mitchell and Strandtmann supersedes that supplied to Domrow (1966a). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocirETy or NEw SoutH WAtEs, Vot. 101, Part 4 210 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 Trichosurolaelaps emanuelae Domrow (Figs. 65-70) T. emanuelae Domrow, 1958, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 82 : 355. Material. Six 29, one deutonymph, and two larvae, Hchymipera kalubu, Upau River, Maprik, P.N.G., 28.xi1.1962, K.K. Four 29, H. kalubu, Kaminibus, 5 km W of Maprik, 7.vi.1963, K.K. Six 99, H. kalubu, Maprik, 20.11.1964, K.K. Deutonymph. Capitulum not conveniently arranged for illustration, but essentially as in 2 (Fig. 67); 135 long, basis 66 wide at midlength (incipient 67 es 1A Figs 65-70. Trichosurolaelaps emanuelae. 65-66, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, deutonymph. 67, Capitulum in ventral view, with true right palp shown dorsally and inset of chelicera in dorsal view, 2. 68-69, Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, larva. 70, Capitulum in ventral view, with true right palp shown dorsally and inset of chelicera in ventral view, larva. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Wates, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 211 lateroventral bosses absent). Basis with setae ¢ not quite reaching its sides. Deutosternum with about six denticles, mostly in single file. Hypostome with setae h,>h,.>h,, lattermost minute. Labial cornicles small, but distinct and well formed. Salivary stylets present. Epistome diaphanous ; no ornamental margin detected. Palpal setal formula (trochanter-tibia) 2.5.5.¢.11, v.e. genu unideficient (al, lacking as in 9; but note that this segment is holotrichous in preceding species, 7. bakeri), and tibia lacking about three setae. Chelicerae 110 long ; digits 22-24 long. Fixed digit pale and edentate, though with some small sclerotizations distally. Movable digit more strongly sclerotized and well Shaped, showing small denticle at midlength in addition to incurved tip. Idiosomal length unavailable because of fracture, but dorsal shield (Fig. 65) 357 long, 193 wide, unincised laterally. Shield with 38* pairs of setae as in 9 (Domrow, 1966a), 7.e. lacking only z, compared with holotrichous condition. Some setae in 2, s, and r series enlarged, intermediate in condition between that of Qand g. One side lacking setae 2, and px,, and also (as far aS can be seen) with some irregularity at sites S,_;. Dorsal cuticle with about 12 pairs of setae of decreasing length posteriorly. Tritosternum (Fig. 66) with median, posteriorly directed spine on base. Sternal shield elongate, with sinuous lateral margins and distinctly tapered posteriorly ; bearing four pairs of setae (second and third pairs longest) and three pairs of pores along margin. Pregenital setae and pores free in cuticle. Anal Shield damaged, but postanal seta considerably stronger than adanal setae ; cribrum present. Ventral cuticle with eight stronger setae set centrally and eight weaker ones marginally. Stigmata and peritremes anticipating those of 9. Coxal and trochanteral armature anticipating that of 9. Leg setation holotrichous, essentially as in 9, except that anterior seta on coxae II-III not expanded. Distal seta on coxa I strongly modified into rounded flange. One v seta on trochanters I-II, and seta av, on tarsi II-III, in form of incipient double spur. One d seta on femora-genua I-II distinctly longer. Larva. Capitulum (Fig. 70) 115 long, basis 58 wide at midlength. Capitular setae absent. Deutosternal details not clear, but hardly fully developed. Hypostome with setae h,_, subequal. Labial cornicles incipient. Salivary stylets present. Epistome not detected. Palpal setal formula (trochanter- tibia) 0.4.5.c.10, 7.e. tibia lacking about two setae. Chelicerae 66 long ; digits stout, subequal, edentate, and 10 long. Idiosoma 285, long, 200 wide. Podonotum (Fig. 68) holotrichous (10 pairs of setae, posteriormost pair thicker). Opisthonotum with five pairs of thicker setae. Tritosternum 52 long; base unarmed (Fig. 69). Sternum with three pairs of setae, but pores not detected. Adanal setae stronger than postanal seta. Ventral cuticle with four pairs of setae (posteriormost two pairs thicker). Stigmata and peritremes absent. Legs holotrichous, undistinguished. Notes. This is the type, and usual host, but no immature stages were previously known in this genus. Trichosurolaelaps marra Domrow T. marra Domrow, 1972, J. Aust. Entomol. Soe., 11 : 300. New host-record. Four 929, three gg, and one deutonymph (containing developing adult) from greater glider, Schoinobates volans (Kerr) (Petauridae), Stanthorpe, Qld, 1974, G. Wolf. * The fifth line of the original description should end “‘. . . with 37 pairs of very small setae and one longer pair ’’. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocteTy oF NEw SoutH WatsEs, Vou. 101, Part 4 aie LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 Notes. The original series were from two other petaurid genera (Petaurus Shaw and Nodder and Gymnobelideus McCoy), and Schoinobates Lesson itself commonly harbours the following species, 7. fallax Domrow. However, the present series are not clear examples of museum contamination since, while they were taken from two S. volans (QM J3598 and 3600, collected in 1922), a third in the same collection (QM J10090, collected in 1956) yielded only 7. fallax. Trichosurolaelaps fallax Domrow T. fallax Domrow, 1972, J. Aust. Entomol. Soc., 11 : 302. Material. Nineteen 99, Schoinobates volans, near Atherton, Qld, 1974, G.W. Notes. See those on T. marra. Genus THADEUA, n. nom. Australolaelaps Womersley, 1956, J. Linn. Soc. 42: 561. Type-species A. mitchelli Womersley, 1956. Non Australolaelaps Girault, 1925, Insecut. Inscit. menstr. 13: 96. Type- species A. aenetceps Girault, 1925 (Hymenoptera). Thadeua serrata, n. sp. (Figs 71-73) Types. Holotype 92 and one paratype 2 from swamp wallaby, Wallabia bicolor (Desmarest) (Marsupialia : Macropodidae), Marlo Plains, Vic., 8.iv.1974, 118}, Holotype in Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra : paratype in author’s Institute. Female. Capitulum (Fig. 73) slender, unarmed, and weakly sclerotized, except for posteroventral third of basis ; 132 long, basis 67 wide. Setae ¢ and hi-s aS in T. rosamondae Domrow, 1973, but former somewhat stronger. Hypostomatal processes not clear, but reaching forward to level of distal ends of palpal genua ; labial cornicles certainly not distinctly horn-like. Deutosternum with five rows of denticles, all single except anteriormost. Epistome not discernible. Palpi of normal proportions, but with hypotrichous setation (probably 2.3.6.8, trochanter-tibia, including dorsodistal tibial rods). Chelicerae not clear, but digits apparently edentate. Idiosoma 437 long, 261 wide including stigmata. Dorsal shield (Fig. 71) parallel-sided, 405 long, 186 wide ; hypotrichous, with 34 pairs of setae (seta 7, lacking on one side of specimen figured). These comprise 19 podonotal pairs (21, 23, and r, lacking), and 15 opisthonotal pairs (px,_, lacking). Setae j,_, and S,_, Slightly, and J; considerably, smaller than remainder. Dorsal cuticle with about three pairs of slender, and three pairs of thickened, setae. Tritosternum (Fig. 72) as in 7. rosamondae. Sternal shield not sharply demarcated, but roundly triangular and bearing first two pairs of sternal setae. Third pair of sternal setae and metasternal setae free in cuticle ; no pores detected. Genital shield bearing only genital pair of setae. Anal shield well developed, strongly sclerotized laterally ; anus well forward, largely in front of adanal setae ; postanal seta slightly shorter ; cribrum distinct. Metapodal shields not detected. Ventral cuticle with about 23 pairs of setae ; of these, anteriormost (including three pairs flanking genital shield) are short and slender, those at level of anus are long and slender, and those behind anus are short and distinctly thickened (recalling, to some extent, Dermanyssus quintus Vitzthum, see Evans and Till, 1966). Stigmata perhaps better described as without peritremes ; complexly chambered. Apart from obliteration of anterior seta on coxa II by incipient spine (in addition to anterodorsal spine), setation of legs holotrichous, with one exception, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTY or NEw Sour Wats, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 213 a bo) OMPY | tral views, Tak 74-75. Neolaelaps oma in ventral view, deutonymph. Figs 71-73. Thadeua serrata. 71—72, Idiosoma in dorsal and ven Capitulum in ventral view, with true left palp shown dorsally, 2. Figs palpispinosus. 74, Dorsal shield, deutonymph. 75, Idios Q. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 914 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 femur II being scored as (2—4/3-1) rather than (2—5/3-1). Apart from occasional minor unideficiencies on femur III, genua I and IV, and tibiae II-III, sole major aberrancy noted was on genu III, viz (1-4/2—0) on one side of one specimen, rather than (2—4/2-1). Seta al on trochanter IV, pl, on genu-tibia I, and two (abnormally one) pl setae on tarsus I distinctly spinose. Coxa I with very weak posterior, and weak anterior, boss. Coxae II-IV each with posterior boss or spine, of increasing strength posteriorly. Coxae-trochanters and, to lesser extent, femora-genua III-IV serrate on distal margins. Tarsus II with sub- terminal ventral spine as in known males (but lacking opposed modified seta on femur IT). Male and immatures. Unknown. Notes. The only other species of Thadeua lacking an enormous hook on — coxa II is T. mitchelli Womersley, 1956, but T. serrata is sharply separable therefrom in showing the following characters : genital shield without usurped ventral setae ; opisthosoma with terminal setae distinctly spinose ; distal margins of coxae-trochanters III-IV serrate ; central segments of legs without retrorse ventral spines ; tarsus II with subterminal spine. As three species of Thadeua have now been recorded from the swamp wallaby (Domrow, 1973), I should perhaps add the following (presumably) confirmatory records. Thadeua mitchell (Womersley) Musial tye mitchelli Womersley, 1956, J. Linn. Soe., 42: 562. Material. Four 929 and one deutonymph from red wallaby, Macropus yufogriseus (Desmarest) (Macropodidae), Waterhouse, Tas., 7.x.1973, R.H.G. Five 2°, Wallabia bicolor, Daylesford, Vic., 9.i.1972, B. J. Coman. Eleven 992 and two 3g, W. bicolor, Bemm River, Orbost, Vic., 11.v.1972, P. L. Stevens. Notes. See those on T. serrata. Thadeua rosamondae (Domrow) Australolaelaps rosamondae Domrow, 1973, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 98: 80. Material. Two 992, Wallabia bicolor, Daylesford, Vic., 9.iii.1972, B.J.C. Notes. See those on T. serrata. Genus BEWSIELLA Domrow ~ Bewsiella Domrow, 1958, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 82: 352. Type-species B. fledermaus Domrow, 1958. Bewsiella fledermaus Domrow B. fledermaus Domrow, 1958, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 82 : 353. New host-record. Five 99 and five $¢ from bat, Hipposideros calcaratus (Dobson) (Chiroptera: Hipposideridae), Kukuba Caves (8°55’S, 146°35’H), P.N.G., 31.viii-1.ix.1972, R. L. Vanderwal. Two 92° and one J, H. calcaratus, same data, but 6.vii.1973, D. E. Moorhouse and G.W. . Genus ICHORONYSSUS Kolenati Ichoronyssus Kolenati, 1858, Wien. ent. Mschr., 2: 5. Type-species Dermanissus seutatus Kolenati, 1856. Ichoronyssus minioptert (Zumpt and Patterson) N cospinolaelaps miniopteri Zuampt and Patterson, 1952, J. ent. Soc. sth. Afr., 15: 159. New host-record. Ten 929, seven gd, and four protonymphs from little bent-wing bat, Miniopterus australis Tomes (Chiroptera: Vespertilionidae), Rockhampton, ald, 26.vil.1974, I. Humphery-Smith and M. Tichon. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrery or NEw SourH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 215 Notes. The protonymph of this species is morphologically inseparable from that of I. scutatus (Kolenati) (see Radovsky, 1967), but consistently 25°, smaller in dimensions of sclerotized structures, e.g. podonotal shield 177-186 long, 146-155 wide (230 x 210 in I. scutatus) ; interval between setae z; (=D3) 84-95 (107-124 in I. scutatus). The length of the idiosoma in my unengorged specimens of I. miniopteri is 248-278 ; Radovsky’s specimens of I. scutatus, slightly engorged to judge from his Fig. 3, measure 390-410. Genus MACRONYSSUS Kolenati Macronyssus Kolenati, 1858, Wien. Entomol. Monatsschr., 2 : 5. Type- species Caris longimana Kolenati, 1856. Macronyssus leucippe (Domrow) (Figs 76-77) Ichoronyssus leucippe Domrow, 1959, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 83 : 227. New host-record. One 2 and one g, Miniopterus australis, Rockhampton, Qld, 26.vii.1974, LHS. and M.T. COs E> ax Pe NN - Figs 76-77. Macronyssus leucippe. Idiosoma in dorsal and ventral views, 3. Notes. Setae z, on the dorsal shield (present in M. leucippe, absent in M. aristippe) provide a useful “ spot’ character. Although both species occur on bats of the genus Miniopterus Bonaparte in Australia, the former is much the rarer. Its male was described by Dusbabek (1970), but additional details of the dorsal, and variation in the ventrianal, shield are now illustrated (Figs 76-77). The dorsal shield is free posteriorly (annulate cuticle can be seen under it), but not modified as in the crosbyi species-group (see Dusbabek and Radovsky, 1972). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 4 LAELAPS AND ALLIED MITES FROM AUSTRALIA. PART 2 bo et =P) Macronyssus aristuppe (Domrow) Ichoronyssus aristippe Domrow, 1959, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 83 : 228. Material. One 92 and four protonymphs, Miniopterus australis, Rock- hampton, Qld, 26.vii.1974, I.H.-S. and M.T. Notes. M. aristippe has been recorded from this host in New Caledonia (Domrow, 1974), but not in Australia. Genus ORNITHONYSSUS Sambon Ornithonyssus Sambon, 1928, Ann. trop. Med. Hyg., 22: 105. Type-species Dermanyssus sylviarum Canestrini and Fanzago, 1877. Ornithonyssus bursa (Berlese) Leiognathus bursa Berlese, 1888, Boll. Soc. ent. ttal., 20 : 208. New host-records. Two 92° from rail’s nest (probably Lewin water rail, Rallus pectoralis Temminck (Gruiformes: Rallidae)), Heron Island, Qld, 21.1.1975, I.H.-S. and L. Conaghan. One 2 walking on man handling white-capped noddy, Anous minutus Boie (Charadriiformes : Laridae), Heron Is., 19.1.1975, I.H.-S. and M.T. Many specimens from nankeen kestrel, Malco cenchroides Vigors and Horsfield (Falconiformes: Falconidae), Long Pocket, Brisbane, Qld, 1.vi.1971, D. H. Kemp. Notes. The ‘ several other bird hosts ” mentioned by Domrow (1966b) are F’. cenchroides (confirmed above as a natural host), Tyto alba, Platycercus adscitus, Gymnorhina tibicen, and Struthidea cinerea (see Leach, 1958, for systematic position of hosts). Ormithonyssus latro Domrow O. latro Domrow, 1963, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 88: 216. Material. One 2 and one protonymph from little bat, Eptesicus puwmilus (Gray) (Vespertilionidae), Carson Escarpment (14°49’S, 126°49’E), W.A., 9-15. viii.1975, I.F.B. Common and M.S. Upton. Notes. This confirms the original record. Genus PNEUMONYSSUS Banks Pneumonyssus Banks, 1901, Geneesk. Tijdschr. Ned.-Indié, 41 : 334. Type- species P. simicola Banks, 1901. Pneumonyssus capricornt Domrow P. capricorm Domrow, 1974, J. Aust. ent. Soc., 13: 21. Material. One larva from spotted cuscus, Phalanger maculatus (Desmarest) (Marsupialia : Phalangeridae), Zoological Gardens, South Perth, W.A., 1975, G. de Chaneet. Notes. This specimen, removed from a faecal extract, could well have been swallowed—the original series was from the trachea of P. maculatus in Papua New Guinea. Sections of lung from a pneumonic scaly-tailed possum, Wyulda squami- caudata Alexander (Phalangeridae), also from the Zoological Gardens, South Perth, but housed separately, showed several unidentifiable mites. References AuLRED, D. M., 1969.—Mites of the genus Laelaps of New Guinea (Acari: Mesostigmata : Laelapidae). J. Med. Hntomol., 6 : 337-385. Domrow, R., 1958.—New and little known Australasian Laelaptidae (Acarina). Proc. Lrn. Soc. N.S.W., 82: 352-366. , 1961.—New and little known Laelaptidae, Trombiculidae and Listrophoridae (Acarina) from Australasian mammals. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 86 : 60-95. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH Watszs, Vou. 101, Part 4 R. DOMROW 217 , 1962.—Mammals of Innisfail. II. Their mite parasites. Aust. J. Zool., 10: 268-306. , 1963a.—The genus Andreacarus in Australia (Acarina: Laelapidae). J. Hntomol. Soc. Queensl., 2 : 9-12. , 1963b.—New records and species of Austromalayan laelapid mites. Proc. Liuyn. Soc. N.S.W., 88 : 199-220. , 1966a.—Some laelapid mites of syndactylous marsupials. Proc. Lioyn. Soc. N.S.W., 90 : 164-175. ————, 1966b.—Some mite parasites of Australian birds. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 90: 190-217. ————, 1967.—Mite parasites of small mammals from scrub typhus foci in Australia. Aust. J. Zool., 15 : 759-798. , 1972.—KHight Australian species of Andreacarus Radford and Haemolaelaps Berlese (Acari: Dermanyssidae). J. Aust. Entomol. Soc., 11 : 105-113. —, 1973.—New records and species of Laelaps and allied genera from Australasia (Acari : Dermanyssidae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 98 : 62-85. , 1974.—Miscellaneous mites from Australian vertebrates. 1-48. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 99: 15-35. DussABEK, F., 1970.—Mite parasites (Acarina) of bats from Afghanistan. Folia parasitol., Prague, 17 : 61-76. ————, and Rapovsxky, 1972.—Macronyssus heteromorphus (Acarina: Macronyssidae) a new species from the Kuril Islands. J. Med. Entomol., 9 : 575-579. Evans, G. O., 1969.—Observations on the ontogenetic development of the chaetotaxy of the tarsi of legs I-IV in the Mesostigmata (Acari). Proc. II Int. Congr. Acarol. (1967), 195-200. ,and Tin, W. M., 1965.—Studies on the British Dermanyssidae (Acari : Mesostigmata). Part I. External Morphology. Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Zool.), 13 : 247-294. ————, 1966.—Studies on the British Dermanyssidae (Acari: Mesostigmata). Part II. Classification. Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Zool.), 14 : 107-370. Herrin, C. S., 1974.—The taxonomic status of Hirstionyssus butantanensis (Fonseca, 1932) (Acari : Mesostigmata). J. Med. Entomol., 11 : 341-346. Hogner, B. E., and Taytor, J. M., 1965.—Systematic relationships among Rattus in southern Australia : evidence from cross-breeding experiments. CSIRO Wildl. Res., 10 : 101-109. Lavrtsg, E. M. O., and Hit, J. E., 1954.—List of land Mammals of New Guinea, Celebes and adjacent Islands. 1758-1952. London : British Museum (Natural History). Leacu, J. A., revised by Morrison, P. C., 1958.—An Australian Bird Book. Melbourne : Whitcombe and Tombs. MrciaKk, M., 1974.—Description of Laelaps dolomydis n. sp. (Acarima-Gamasoidea) from Dolomys bogdanovi in Yugoslavia. Annotnes Zool. Bot., 90 : 1-13. Rapovsky, F. J., 1967.—The Macronyssidae and Laelapidae (Acarina : Mesostigmata) parasitic on bats. Univ. Calif., Berkeley, Publ. Entomol., 46 : 1-288. Ripe, W. D. L., 1970.—A Guide to the native Mammals of Australia. Melbourne : Oxford University Press. Tenorio, J. M., and Rapovsky, F. J., 1973.—Two new species of Trichosurolaelaps (Acarina : Laelapidae, Hirstionyssinae) from New Guinea. J. Med. Entomol., 10 : 147-157. ————, 1974.—The genus Mesolaelaps (Laelapidae: Mesolaelapinae, n. subfam.) with deser ptions of two new species from New Guinea. J. Med. Entomol., 11 : 211-222. Tiui, W. M., 1963.—Ethiopian mites of the genus Androlaelaps Berlese s. lat. (Acari : Mesostig- mata). Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Zool.), 10 : 1-104. Treton, V. J., ALTMAN, R. M., and Keenan, C. M., 1966.—Mites of the subfamily Laelaptinae in Panama (Acarina: Laelaptidae). In Wenzel, R. L., and Tipton, V. J., (Eds.), Ectoparasites of Panama. Chicago: Field Museum of Natural History, 23-81. Witson, N., 1967.—Acarina: Mesostigmata. Dermanyssidae, Laelapidae, Spinturnicidae parasitic on vertebrates. Insects Micronesia, 3: 133-148. WomeERrsLeEY, H., 1955.—The Acarina fauna of mutton birds’ nests on a Bass Strait island. Avst. J. Zool., 3 : 412-438. , 1956.—On some new Acarina-Mesostigmata from Australia, New Zealand and New Guinea. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), 42 : 505-599. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soorery of New SourH Wa ss, Vou. 101, Part 4 SIR WILLIAM MACLEAY MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1976* THE BIOGEOGRAPHIC BASIS OF NATIONAL CULTURES CHARLES A. FLEMINGT In November 1851, T. H. Huxley wrote to William Macleay in Sydney that he had been working ‘in all things with a reference to wide views of zoological philosophy ” and writing reports to explain his ideas of individuality among the lower animals. He chose this subject for his first public lecture, to the Royal Institution, when he faced a unique audience composed of scientists of several disciplines and of London’s high society (Jensen, 1976). Tonight I face a similar challenge, with the additional task of producing, from a lifetime as a New Zealand naturalist, something digestible to a New South Wales audience quite as inter- disciplinary and quite as distinguished as a Royal Institution audience of 1851. In the century and a quarter that has passed since then, science has gone through a cycle of increasing specialisation but the generalist is once more in favour, so that we can once again emphasise the unity of nature and aspire to know less and less about more and more. My theme is not the individuality of animals but the individuality of whole biotas and of cultures and the contribution made to cultural individuality by the differences in the character of the wilderness and its inhabitants on opposite sides of the Tasman Sea, differences that result from their different biogeographic histories. Culture is defined as “‘the development of those qualities that characterise our humanity ’’, so much of our culture is not national but universal and international. My text and inspiration come from an essay by the American naturalist Aldo Leopold, printed with his Sand County Almanak (1966) ‘‘ a little cockle- shell of a book ”’ (as W. H. Hudson (1915) called The Natural History of Selborne) that seems likely to survive the storms of time just as well as Gilbert White’s classic. ‘‘ Wilderness’, wrote Aldo Leopold, ‘‘is the raw material out of which man has hammered the artifact called civilization’. In different parts of the world ‘‘ wilderness was very diverse, so the resulting artifacts are very diverse. These differences in the end product are known as cultures. The rich diversity of the world’s cultures reflects a corresponding diversity in the wilds that gave them birth ”’. This statement gives a logical basis for a values concept, and even if only partly true, it may have a contribution to make to a world where the importance of facts is recognised but where value judgements (except for that will-o-the-wisp ‘‘ truth ”’) tend to be repudiated as subjective. The indigenous bases of culture have often been obscured by the export of cultural images by dominant nations. This happened with the lion, which once ranged throughout the greater part of Europe, West Asia and Africa, but became progressively restricted before and during the historic period. The mediaeval bestiary fell open at the chapter on the lion, royal beast of virtue which Richard I - introduced into British heraldry as an almost legendary animal. In earlier * Delivered on 12th August 1976 in the Science Centre, Sydney. t+ New Zealand Geological Survey, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research Lower Hutt, New Zealand. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sour Watss, Vou. 101, Part 4 eS Cc. A. FLEMING 219 centuries, however, Babylon, Assyria, Mycaenae, Delos, and Asia Minor knew the lion as a wild animal, giving it a prominent place in their sculpture. One small figurine, from Aspendos in Turkey, is carved from calcilutite originally deposited in the Tethys Sea, reminding us that available indigenous raw materials have always played an important part in encouraging or limiting developments in art or technology. For instance, the famous 12th Century chessmen from the Isle of Lewis, Romanesque (and thus derivative) in design, are carved in walrus ivory and thereby identified as a product of northern Europe, since the walrus rarely straggled south of Norway (King, 1964) and its ivory was not traded as extensively as elephant ivory. As the characteristic ornament of Corinthian capitals, the Greeks reproduced in stone the Acanthus, a plant native to the Mediterranean and adjacent regions ; it grows well in our New Zealand gardens but has ceased to inspire the sculptor in the Antipodes. One could continue to illustrate the part played by the local wilderness in the art forms or literature of the Old World. lt I Tn AN. HAKHS | Fig. 1. Lion figurine (125 mm), Aspendos, Turkey (a) ; Chessmen from the Isle of Lewis, whale ivory, c. 95 mm (British Museum) (b) ; Acanthus ornament on Corinthian capital (c). Let us come nearer our own time and our own place. All immigrants to our lands brought with them the memory of a voyage and their earlier environment (Holcroft, 1943). In eastern Polynesia the breadfruit (Artocarpus) replaced the yam (Dioscorea) as the staple source of carbohydrate food. In Polynesian tradition, the migration of the Arawa Canoe to New Zealand was the result of a theft of breadfruit. Te Rangihiroa (Sir Peter Buck), bridge builder between New Zealand’s two cultures, records (1974) an ancient dirge: ‘“‘ Sacred tree of Hawaiki, the home land, on the other side of Tahiti Nui, the kuru or breadfruit tree that sheltered the house of Uenuku, the high chief”’. A young man named Tamatekapua and his brother stole its fruit by night and as a result his people were forced to emigrate to New Zealand where the story was handed on. But in a land where the breadfruit did not grow the elders had difficulty in explaining what the kuru was and substituted the poroporo, two species of Solanum, familiar blue-flowered shrubs on both sides of the Tasman with berries sometimes eaten by Maori children. Ye poroporo whakamarumaru o Uenuku, the sheltering poroporo of Uenuku (Solanum aviculare or 8S. laciniatum) now contributes to contemporary culture as a source of a glycoside called solasonine, a most promising raw material for the production of steroid drugs (Lancaster and Mann, 1975) including reproductive hormones increasingly demanded by birth control programmes (Fawkner, 1974). For new countries, colonised from afar, the relationship between culture and nature has not been easy to accept. In Australia, older and more mature as a PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocireTY oF New SoutH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 4 220 SIR WILLIAM MACLEAY MEMORIAL LECTURE nation than New Zealand, quite an extensive literature has appeared on cultural development, in which national and international phases seemed to alternate. Naturalists on both sides of the Tasman are likely to agree (in my opinion) with A. G. Serle (1973) that: ‘‘ Culture and everything else begins from scratch in a new country, despite the inheritance of the whole of European and English culture’, and ‘‘ Culture is a highly perishable growth, which, transplanted, cannot bloom as before ”’. The same west European (mainly British) people brought to Australia and New Zealand memories of Yule logs and Christmas robin redbreasts as inappropriate as hot plum pudding in a southern December, yet the two environ- ments on either side of the Tasman were sufficiently different to ensure different cultural products. To this, differences between Australia and New Zealand in physical geography, climate, and biology have all contributed. But it was not always so. Fig. 2. Breadfruit (Artocarpus) (a), and Poroporo (Solanum laciniatum), its substitute m the Maori legend of the Arawa Canoe (b). The concepts of a southern super-continent, Gondwanaland (Suess, 1883— 1909), of continental drift (Wegener, 1924) whereby jigsaw pieces of the crust later drifted apart to become the southern lands we know today, of sea floor spreading, and of plate tectonics represent successive stages in our enlightenment, in which the conviction of geologists like S. W. Carey (1958) was confirmed, as new discoveries in sea floor structure overcame the earlier scepticism of geophysicists (see e.g. Heirtzler, 1968 ; Hurley, 1968 ; Hayes and Pitman, 1970). As P. M. 8. Blackett (1965) once commented: “in complex subjects a highly simplified model which can explain a large number of facts is invaluable, especially when it suggests new observations ”’ which generally force the researcher to make the model more complicated. Reconstructions of Gondwanaland and histories of its disruption still differ in detail but the degrees of freedom have progressively diminished as detailed analyses and interpretations bring in more and more factors to control the ‘‘ fit ”’. From the Permian to the Jurassic, when disruption began, Gondwanaland certainly shared a common biota. Its unity persisted as it changed during the Cretaceous while the early phases of drift took place. Permian Glossopteris vegetation gave way to Triassic Dicroidium vegetation and then in the Cretaceous PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF New SourH Watss, Vou. 101, Part 4 Cc. A. FLEMING 221 to the forbears of living ferns and conifers—araucarians and podocarps—and soon afterwards to the first angiosperms, including Nothofagus southern beeches and an abundance of Proteaceae. The fauna included lungfishes, primitive amphicoelan frogs, the ancestors of monotremes and of ratite birds, dinosaurs and other reptiles such as rhynchocephalians. Perhaps we have exaggerated the uniformity of Gondwanaland, which certainly was at times broken up by epicontinental seas (Teichert, 1974) and was probably quite diverse in climate and vegetation so that not all parts necessarily had precisely the same biota ; but what evidence we have indicates substantial uniformity, which is why Suess invented Gondwanaland to begin with. Africa, the first continent to break away, took with it a lungfish, the two-toed ratites (which were subsequently shared with Eurasia), Proteaceae and podocarps, apparently before Nothofagus beeches and marsupials had evolved. a Pez S gn a Fig. 3. The Australasian part of Gondwanaland. An assembly by R. A. Cooper (N.Z. Geological Survey) using a reconstruction of New Zealand by H. W. Wellman (1975). Differentiation of the plants and animals in different Gondwana fragments proceeded as they separated. ‘‘ Sweepstakes’’ colonisation across marine barriers brought different colonists to different subcontinents. There was a similar ‘“‘ sweepstakes extinction ’’ that resulted from differences in survival, influenced by diverging geography and climates in the Tertiary. For much of the Tertiary Australia and New Zealand vegetation was similar, warm temperate to subtropical rain forest with dominant Nothofagus and podocarps and with many other common elements including araucarians and proteaceous plants and ratites. Already, before the end of the Mesozoic, some 65 million years ago, plants and animals that contribute to our national cultures were established on either PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocIETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 222 SIR WILLIAM MACLEAY MEMORIAL LECTURE —_————~ — > SS ~ Fig. 4. Sphenodon, the Tuatara, last of the Rhyncocephalia (a), and the Kiwi (Apteryz) (b) descendants of the Gondwanaland fauna. side of a Tasman Sea that had just begun to develop, but there were fewer contrasts in climate, vegetation and presumably fauna than there are today. Both countries share some of the Mesozoic tree ferns (mamaku and ponga in New Zealand) which characterise the rain forests on both sides of the Tasman and which inspired the New Zealand poet A. R. D. Fairburn (1966) to write ‘* Conversation in the Bush ” : Observe the young and tender frond of this punga : shaped and curved like the scroll of a fiddle : fit instrument to play archaic tunes. I see the shape of a coiled spring. Australia must have had ancestors of such Proteaceae as Banksia and Macadamia that have undoubtedly been modified subsequently in adaptation to a drier climate. Pa Ab AS ee Sy Fs ae eee Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 101, Part 4 PLATE XI PLATE XI Fig. 1. Permotanyderus ableptus Riek. B.M. (N.H.) In. 45378. Figs 2-3. Choristotanyderus nanus Riek. B.M. (N.H.) In. 45444. Normal and reversed lighting to show details of the body structure. EK, F. RIEK 2A CuA | M Fig. 1. Permotanyderus ableptus Riek. B.M. (N.H.) In. 45378. Figs 2,3. Choristotanyderus nanus Riek. 2. Fore wing, B.M. (N.H.) In. 45444. holotype, F. 39964. 253 3. Wings of PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 254 FOUR-WINGED DIPTERA FROM THE UPPER PERMIAN not discernible in the holotype, a detailed description of the specimen follows. (Specimen figured, also venation of the holotype.) British Museum (Natural History) specimen In. 45444. Lateral view of an almost complete insect. Length 5mm. Fore wing (extreme base not preserved) c. 5 mm. Head. lateral view. Similar in shape and structure of preserved parts to that of Blephariceridae. Hye large, subrounded, occupying most of the lateral head except for the produced lower head that is about one-third of eye length. Lower margin of clypeus apparently somewhat angular laterally. Labrum, apparently seen in dorsal view due to some distortion of this part of the head, stout, heavily sclerotized, stiletto-like, about as long as eye. Antenna with at least seven subequal, subquadrate articles; with basal article slightly enlarged but not i clearly preserved ; pedicel not differentiated. Labium (?) ill-defined but wider than labrum, preserved obliquely between labrum and antennae. Maxillary palp (2) with fir st segment long and thin. Thorax. Large, convex dorsally. Structure of the lateral thorax difficult to interpret because of confusion between endoskeleton and the exoskeleton of both sides of the body but resembling that of Tipulidae of short stocky build, except that the metathorax is large. Laterally, thorax at least as deep as long. Sterno- pleuron of mesothorax of only moderate size so that the fore and middle legs are only moderately separated. Propleuron small, mesopleuron and metapleuron large. Pronotum relatively large, with distinctly defined dorsum level with anterior margin of mesonotum and with a median transverse sulcus dividing it into subequal anterior and posterior portions. Mesonotum large, upper surface distinctly convex in lateral view ; scutellum small, subrounded ; parapsides large, divided by distinct mesonotal “‘ suture’; anterior part of scutum smaller than parapsis. Pteropleuron of mesothorax apparently about half as large as sternopleuron. Metanotum large, more than half as long as mesonotum, not as strongly raised as mesonotum and without distinctly defined scutellum or other sub-divisions. Metapleuron similar to that of mesothorax with clearly defined pleural ‘‘ suture”? but smaller, with sternopleuron larger than pteropleuron. Legs. Long and very thin, at least as long as length of body, but preservation not distinct enough to indicate relative proportions. Abdomen. Distinctly shorter than wings, very distended over middle segments, apex not exposed. Efforts had been made in the past to expose the hidden apex but this was not done very professionally so that it is now risky to proceed further to expose the area that may cover the apex of the abdomen. However, from the very markedly bulged abdomen tapering to apex one can infer that the Specimen was almost certainly a female. The basal section of first abdominal segment apparently fused with metathorax (as in Recent Diptera, Mecoptera and other holometabolous orders) but level with remainder of abdomen ; basal section narrow; apical section widely separated from basal, apparently not disrupted but connected by only lightly sclerotized membrane ; apical part about twice as long as basal, but transverse. Second segment much longer, longer than the first as preserved. Third to fifth segments subequal to second, sixth slightly shorter, seventh not completely visible. Abdomen tapering towards apex from fifth segment. Sterna very faintly preserved, without heavily sclerotized plates, at least as broad as terga on segments 2 and 3, slightly narrower on 4, and decreasing on 5-7. Wings. Parts of all four wings preserved, but hind wings not as complete as in one hind wing of holotype and the more complete fore wing crumpled in area of M. Fore wing. Wide at base, widening regularly to beyond middle, rather pointed at apex with fore margin tapering beyond the pterostigma almost as much as hind margin (as in Psychodidae). Hind margin slightly concave in the middle, before apex of CuA. Anal area large, with wing broad at base. Pterostigma PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocteTty oF NEw SoutH WAtEs, Vow. 101, Part 4 E. F. RIEK 255 large, extending well below RK almost to Rs 1+2. Sc extending well into pterostigma and ending on the costal margin, with an oblique connection to R at base of pterostigma but extending into it. KR distinctly kinked towards base, ending well before apex of the wing. Rs arising slightly before middle of wing, 4-branched, with Rs 1+2 forking much more distally than Rs 3+4, with Rs 4 ending at wing apex. M 4-branched, with both forks deep but M 3+4 branching well before M1+2. Stem of M continued towards base below the stem of R at the kink and cross connection from near base of M to CuA oblique, strong, continuing the line of the base of M so that CuA almost appears to arise from the wing base. CuA strong, distinctly downcurved towards wing margin. CuP and stem of Cu weak but defined, with CuP well separated from CuA. 1A strong, parallel to CuP, about as distant from CuP as CuP is from CuA. 2A widely separated from 1A and much shorter, base not preserved. There appear to be three anals in this more completely preserved wing but the vein in the middle is actually the fore margin of the hind wing. Hind margin of wing continued straight more basally than the apex of 2A so that a short 3A was probably present, as in some Recent Diptera (in which it is extremely short). Cross veins few, clearly defined between Rs 4 and M 1 (the r—m cross vein), and between M 1+2 and M 3 to enclose a discoidal cell. (The m—cu cross vein from M 3+4 to CuA is preserved in the holotype.) There may have been a cross vein from R to Rs 1-2 but, if so, it is obscured by the pterostigma. Hind wing. About two-thirds as long as fore wing. Base not preserved. Venation reduced. R distinctly curved (concave) at the origin of Rs. Rs 3-branched, arising well beyond the middle of R, with Rs 1+2 simple. Se not clearly preserved. Combined costal and subcostal spaces wide. (Structures of hind wing more clearly preserved in the holotype. Wing slightly pointed at apex but with fore margin almost straight to apex. Sc apparently short, not entirely preserved. M 2-branched, appearing to arise from CuA about its middle. CuA appearing to arise from R close to the base. CuP and stem of Cu not visible. One anal vein partly preserved.) At least fore and apical margins of both fore and hind wings with fine setae, often indicated only by the setal insertions. Setae of the order of 30-40 between the branches of the veins, less between Rs 1 and Rs 2. The setae on the costal margin are dense and irregular. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I am grateful to John Green for the photographs and Mrs. Sybil Monteith for the final line drawings. I also wish to thank Dr. H. W. Ball, Keeper of Palaeontology, British Museum (Natural History) for the loan of the specimens on which this study was based. References Martynova, O. M., 1948.—Materials on the evolution of the Mecoptera. Tr. Paleontol. Inst. Akad. Nauk SSSR, 14 (1) : 1-76. [In Russian]. , 1961.—In, Rohdendorf, B. B., Becker-Migdisova, E. E., Martynova, O. M. and Sharov A. G. Palaeozoic insects of the Kuznetsk Basin. J'r. Paleontol. Inst. Akad. Nauk SSSR, 85 : 1-705. [In Russian]. , 1962.—In, Rohdendorf, B. B. (Editor). Arthropoda. Insecta. Jn, Bases of Palaeon- tology : 29-374. Moscow. [In Russian]. Riex, H. F., 1953.—Fossil mecopteroid insects from the Upper Permian of New South Wales. Rec. Aust. Mus., 23 : 55-87. , 1968.—Robinjohnia tillyardi Martynova, a mecopteron from the Upper Permian of Belmont, New South Wales. Rec. Aust. Mus., 27 : 299-302. , 1970.—Fossil history [of the insects]. Jn, Insects of Australia. Melbourne : CSIRO. 1029 pp. lgeiy ADS R. J., 1929.—Permian Diptera from Warner’s Bay, New South Wales. Nature, Lond., 123 : 778-81. —, 1937.—The ancestors of the Diptera. Nature, Lond., 139 : 66-7. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 4 GILBERT PERCY WHITLEY, 1903-1975 (Memorial Series No. 23) Gilbert Whitley, president of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 1963-64, a councillor since 1961 and a member for 49 years, died suddenly on July 18, 1975. He had that day been discharged from hospital following treatment for a heart-attack suffered during a customary walk to the harbour-side from his house in Mosman, Sydney. ‘The first signs that all was not well came in April when he was laid up while on a family visit to Athens. He had intended to continue on a working tour of Huropean museums and libraries but, instead, was forced to return home. Back at our council table in June he seemed cheerful though disappointed by what he termed lightly the ravages of old-age. On the day before the next meeting we were called to his funeral. His passing closes a chapter in the record of Australian science, a chapter to which he and a small group of dedicated friends at the Australian Museum in Sydney made noteable contributions. One thinks of Anthony Musgrave (1895— 1959), Tom Iredale (1880-1972) and Ellis Troughton (1893-1974)—another of our past-presidents—as likewise of that band. Few in our time came nearer to maintaining the broad concern for natural history expressed by the founders of the Linnean Society than these. Few responded more enthusiastically to exploring the faunal variety of the Australian region. Gilbert Percy Whitley was born June 9, 1903, at Swathling near South- hampton and received grammar school training in his native Hampshire to the Cambridge Junior Certificate. While still at school he had found fascination in nature out-of-doors. At every opportunity he would be off in the countryside with sketch-book and collecting-net. Butterflies and moths were then his favourites and if later they had to compete for attention with other creatures the youthful enthusiasm for work in the field never disappeared. In 1921 his parents removed to Australia with their son and two younger daughters. The family settled in Sydney where for nearly a year Gilbert worked in a warehouse. In his spare time he continued to sketch, so competently it — would seem that Gilbert’s father, a lace buyer, was urged by one of the warehouse staft to encourage his son’s creative talent. A congenial opportunity soon came and on April 18, 1922, Gilbert Whitley joined the staff of the Australian Museum as cadet in the Department of Fishes, then the charge of Allan Riverstone McCulloch. There could have been no better teacher from whom to learn the business, but the association was sadly short ; Gilbert had to acquire much of his ichthyology untutored. During that first year McCulloch was away in New Guinea and the young cadet spent part of the time attending H. A. Briggs’s zoology course at the Sydney Technical College. In 1924 he gained Distinction and first place in the 2nd Year Zoology examinations at the University of Sydney but, being unmatriculated, a full degree course lay beyond his reach. In any case, duties at the Museum were increasingly demanding. McCulloch’s health gave way and he died at Honolulu in September 1925 while on recuperative leave. By 1926 Whitley was Ichthyologist in charge of the department, a post from which he retired in August 1964 to devote his time to research, maintaining his connection with the Museum as an Honorary Associate. One of the first tasks confronting the new curator was the editing for publication of his predecessor’s A Check List of the Fishes Recorded from Australia. As Memoir no. 5 of the Museum it appeared in 1929-30, by which time the number of his own publications was growing apace. His pen scarcely rested. Were there PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 101, Part 4 GILBERT PERCY WHITLEY, 1903-1975 (MEMORIAL SERIES NO. 23) 257 truth in the dictum ‘ publish or perish” Gilbert Whitley ought to have been practically immortal! At the close of his career the list of his published writings runs to well over 500 titles—research papers and monographs, contributions to encyclopaedias and the like, as well as popular natural history pieces in magazines and newspapers—and some of his writings are only now being printed. The Sheer magnitude of the list precludes its addition to this memorial where only a few samples can be mentioned. One wonders when he found time for letter- writing though he very clearly did. Many friends and colleagues about the world must treasure spontaneous notes from him that are gems of mixed wisdom and whimsy. The compiler of a complete Whitley bibliography will face a daunting task, not because of the mass of his own pieces, for he was meticulous in keeping his census up-to-date, but because he became a sort of resident sage, albeit a most modest one, on matters relating to Australian fishes. Anything unusual found at the Sydney Fish Markets or by fishermen along the coast, reports of sharks and so forth, would be referred to him by journalists. In the popular view he was the authority to be consulted, and quoted. This writer lacks the expertise to comment on the quality of the ichthyological ~ work but is certainly impressed by the quantity. Some 340 of Whitley’s published works deal with the subject! If one consults the census of fish species recorded from Australia to the year 1964 (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 89, 1964, pp. 32-60) it will be found that of the 2,447 names more than 320 of them were introduced by Gilbert Whitley. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocimeTy or New SoutH Watss, Vot. 101, Part 4 258 GILBERT PERCY WHITLEY, 1903-1975 (MEMORIAL SERIES NO. 23) No doubt many of those new names were fixed on material collected during his own travels. Travel was an activity vastly to Gilbert’s taste and much of it he managed in his own time and at his own expense. Naturally gregarious, he enjoyed science congresses and excursions and made it his business to secure what came his way for the Museum collections. His first annual holidays in 1923 were spent at Lord Howe Island gathering insects with Anthony Musgrave. With longer periods of leave he ventured further—to Hurope and the United States, to Japan and Asia, to Polynesia and so forth. The omission of Africa was corrected when he joined a safari tour in his years of so-called retirement. Back with him from these journeys came funds of stories, scientific, scholarly, aesthetic or simply bizarre. One recalls lively accounts of dog-eating in Tahiti, or dining out on poisonous fish in Tokyo, of Hitler’s Berlin in 1937, and many more, less vivid perhaps but no less captivating. Travel came also through invitations to join scientific expeditions, among the last being an American-Australian venture in the Tasman Sea during 1973. Back in 1928 he had spent three months with the British Great Barrier Reef Expedition led by C. M. (later, Sir Maurice) Yonge. Whitley’s report on the fishes of the Low Isles appeared as one of the expedition papers issued by the British Museum (Natural History) in 1932. The 1929 visit of the Danish research vessel Dana brought an opportunity to sail as a guest-worker with Professor Johannes Schmidt. Again, in 1951 he worked with Anton Bruun aboard Galathea, for which efforts he was awarded a silver medal by the King of Denmark. Early in 1942, with the approval of the Museum trustees, Gilbert joined the CSIR (now CSIRO) Division of Fisheries to assist in the elucidation of problems relating to edible fish—what and where they are. In a time of war the search for additional sources of food was a matter of priority. The secondment lasted until 1946 and involved much work at sea in Australian and New Guinea waters. His bulletin on Poisonous and Harmful Fishes, issued by the CSIR, dates from this period. Further investigations in the New Guinea region occupied another secondment to CSIR in 1948. Not all his voyages were quite so nicely managed. One in particular, that of April-May 1936, might have ended tragically. Norman Wallis, a Sydney yachtsman, had purchased salvage rights to a wreck on Middleton Reef in the Coral Sea and organised an expedition to inspect the locality, then little known. High seas plagued the voyage and at one stage Wallis and two sailor-companions were washed overboard leaving, in Gilbert’s own words, ‘ a very seasick naturalist for a short time in sole possession of the ship’. His story is woven into an article ‘ Graveyards of the Pacific’ printed in the Australian Museum Magazine for 1936. There, with characteristic relish, he reported that by taking possession of Elizabeth and Middleton Reefs in the name of the Crown, the party had made the first territorial additions to the empire of King Edward VIII! In July of the year before Gilbert ventured north to the Cumberland Group, off the Queensland coast, in search of the Devil Ray (Daenomanta alfredi). The first recorded specimen of this strange creature had been caught in Sydney Harbour in 1868. An anonymous author, whom Whitley identified as Gerard Krefft, sometime Curator of the Australian Museum, described it in local newspapers of the time. The name honoured H.R.H. Prince Alfred who had just escaped assassination here. Gilbert delighted to resurrect such details and to remind his readers of the work done by our forbears. It is beyond estimating the hours he spent at the Mitchell and other libraries poring through files of old newspapers and documents in search of material on Australian natural history and those who contributed to our knowledge and collections. His notes, laboriously copied in longhand in the days before xerox, were ever at the service of enquirers. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SourH WALES, Vou. 101, Part 4 GILBERT PERCY WHITLEY, 1903-1975 (MEMORIAL SERIES NO. 23) 259 This attraction to history is not surprising. After all, he worked in Australia’s oldest museum. Robert Etheridge, director from 1895 until 1920, had shown the way. His successor, Charles Anderson, also evinced historical sympathies. Both directors in their historical work were concerned particularly with documentation, with bringing together the facts of historical record, rather than interpretation and method. Such, too, was the preference of Gilbert Whitley and his friends Iredale and Musgrave. Indeed, the trio became dedicated bibliographers. Whitley and Iredale were founder-members (1936) of the Society for the Bibliography of Natural History, London, first presided over by that splendid character Dr. C. Davies Sherborn, a fertile influence on the Sydney friends. Whitley’s published bibliographical work consists chiefly in the appendices to his presidential address (A Survey of Australian Ichthyology) to this society in 1964 and to his many biographical studies. The choice of subjects for these latter is revealing. They include, of course, friends like Tom Iredale, whom he regarded as the Australian Linnaeus though some may feel that honour should be shared. Others less well-remembered also appear. He enjoyed seeking justice for the underdogs. Gerard Krefft, not generously treated by the trustees of the Australian Museum, is a case in point. John Lhotsky, another naturalist who had more than his share of rough treatment in this country, is another. A monograph on this forgotten visitor, his work and works will appear in 1977 ; to it Gilbert contributed an article and part of the bibliography. If belated credit comes to Lhotsky’s reputation it will be in large measure through the efforts of this unmilitant crusader. Nearer the society’s interests perhaps is the study and catalogue of our collection of paintings by Dr. James Stuart, a collection now deposited for safe-keeping in the Mitchell Library. That work, by Musgrave, Iredale and Whitley, appeared in the Australian Zoologist in 1955. In addition to these studies of individuals, there are more general historical works that deserve mention. The paper Some Early Naturalists and Collectors in Australia issued by the Royal Australian Historical Society (of which he was _ long a member and for a time a councillor) in its journal for 1933, remains a valuable review. To celebrate Sydney’s sesqui-centenary in 1938 came a study on the naturalists of the First Fleet in the Australian Museum Magazine. There ten years later appeared his article on some founders of Australian fish science. His last words on the early history of Australian zoology are to be found in two monographs published 1970 and 1975 by the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales. The later work is an elaboration of an address delivered on completion of his third term (1973-75) as president of that society, a society whose fellowship (F.R.Z.S.) he had enjoyed since 1934 and which he served as editor for the period 1947-1971. A history of the Australian Museum, the fruits of his many years’ honorary work as Historian and Archivist, remains unpublished. One may hope that in this 150th year of the Museum efforts will be made to bring it out of the shadows, if only in an edited version. Failure to find a sponsor to publish the history had been a disappointment for Gilbert, the more so as the cost of printing was quite beyond his own resources. That must be said for, in fact, many of his works were printed with the aid of handsome subsidies from his own pocket. In the case of his grandfather’s African journal (Nathan Whitley’s Journal, Sydney, 1972) he met the whole cost himself. It is a work, incidentally, expressing something of the close family attachments that remained such a strength to Gilbert. He found riches enough there and with his friends and his work. Never ambitious of worldly wealth, he lived a bachelor in modest but hospitable comfort that left him sufficient means to travel occasionally and for private acts of generosity, not least of which were donations to societies like our own troubled by escalating costs for printing. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watszs, Vow. 101, Part 4 260 GILBERT PERCY WHITLEY, 1903-1975 (MEMORIAL SERIES NO. 23) That may seem a solemn view of this most un-solemn man. He long enjoyed the unofficial title of Museum Bard, awarded in recognition of his ‘ Pomes’ composed for special occasions such as a farewell party for a staff member. Many examples survive, characteristically light-hearted pieces full of puns and tortured rhymes, that set up the foibles of their subjects. The compliment was returned, of course. With apologies to W. S. Gilbert, his friend Anthony Musgrave made him “‘.. . the very model of a modern ichthyologist...”. Another colleague waxed lyrical in The Prisoner’s Song celebrating Gilbert’s arrest one Sunday in 1939 for (inadvertent) trespass on the military reserve at North Head— while collecting butterflies. Gilbert, in fact, was keenly interested in all the arts. He was a regular concert- and theatre-goer ; he missed few good films and art exhibitions. He had a considerable knowledge of music and found much enjoyment playing the piano. Gilbert’s long connections with our society, with the Royal Zoological Society of N.S.W. and with the Royal Australian Historical Society have been mentioned. Many others will remember him. For a time he served as councillor in the Anthropological Society of N.S.W. and in 1972 was president of the Australian Society of Fish Biology. Work on behalf of ANZAAS and the Australian Great Barrier Reef Committee call for record. He sought no rewards, much preferring to work without fuss, but two major honours came his way—and when they did he alone was surprised. In 1967 there was the Australian Natural History Medallion. Three years later the Royal Society of N.S.W. bestowed on him its Clarke Medal. For that occasion his friend Oliver Chalmers prepared a splendid citation (printed anonymously, J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 104, 1971, pp. 106-7) giving many details of a long and notable career of service to Australian natural history that are not repeated here. We remember Gilbert Whitley with affection and pride. ‘“¢ The sweetest canticle is Nunc Dimittis, when a man hath achieved worthy ends ”’. [Warm thanks are extended to Mrs. Marjorie Frewer, Gilbert’s sister, and his friend Mr. R. O. Chalmers for help and advice in the preparation of this memorial. ] T. G. VALLANCE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH Watszs, Vou. 101, Part 4 i Index Vol. 101 Page Page etaptive PEA eAnGe of the loss of an Fijian insects, food plants or hosts of .. 237 oviduct in reptiles 242 Fleming, C. A., The biogeographic basis Allen, G. R., A new species of Scorpaenid of national cultures, (Sin William ae (Scorpaenidae) fi from Western Macleay Memorial Lecture 1976) .. 218 ustralia 145 Four-winged Diptera from the Upper Andreacarus balanites, new species 186 Permian of Australia 3 fs 250 Annual General Meeting . bye 1 Gould, R. E., see Retallack, G. Anopheles punctulatus complex, bio- Greenwood, W.., The food plants or hosts nomics and behaviour patterns of, of some Fijian insects. V. .. 237 x the D’Entrecasteaux Isiands, Greer, A. E., On the adaptive significance apua _ ae tan ae se 20) of the loss of an oviduct in reptiles .. 242 Atopomelidae (Acari); Campylochirus Isotopic dating of a middle Triassic mega- Trouessart and aie isons: fossil : 77 Fain 27 Laelaps and allied genera, new ; records Australolaelaps Womersley, new name and species of, from Australasia .. 186 a ace proposed 5 .. 186 Luig, N. H., and Watson, I. A., The role alance Sheets es Be tes 7 of barley, rye and grasses in the Banksia serratifolia, aspleniifolia and 1973-74 wheat stem rust epiphytotic : ees Ee 38 in southern and eastern Australia .. 65 arkas, arly Devonian igneous Macleay, Sir William, Memorial Lecture activity and some stratigraphic cor- 1976 218 relations in the Tumut region ae be Megafossil flora, middle Triassic, isotopic Barley, rye and grasses, their role in the dating of : el 1973-74 wheat stem rust epiphytotic Memorial Series No. 23, ‘Gilbert Perey _ insouthern and eastern Australia... 65 Whitley, 1903-1975 . 256 Biogeographic basis of national cultures 218 Myerscough, P. J., see Siddiqi, M. Y. Brachionus baylyi, new species 162 Oviduct, adaptive Rone of loss of Campylochiropsis Fain, parasite of phalan- in reptiles Nit | 242 geroid marsupials in Australasia 27 P a hal d 1 Campylochirus Trouessart, parasite of sae cS He ie 2 Giese eels 2 phalangeroid marsupials in Austra- QU ULOCIUNUS ch LOUCSSALE, BCT Tata Tee 27 pylochtropsis Fain Conor eb. s Carolin, R. C., see Siddiqi, M. Y. P ene Sable Mealaecdt ibe a) Coastal heath in New South Wales, ae! See? a ug! Se. yatenny ellos 250 ecology of. The effects of water P on ma ee OPI BE ie supply and phosphorus uptake on BER era, a new suborder o iptera. . the growth of Banksia serratijolia, Phytodietini, final-instar larvae of -. 114 B.asplenifoliaand B.ericifolia . 38 Eayugmeucle, aaa Stages G2 ince 149 Coastal heath in New South Wales, R mae be Be f taro ecology of. Regrowth of vegetation Bene elt eeEa ON after fire in 53 after fire 53 Corals, Upper Ordovician tabulate, from repel om ae Aveevug wir une Society for 1 central-western New South Wales 56 Gz Peneil Oe apa Nae} E. al Culicidae, anopheles punctulatus complex, m nae : oe Te ar pe a in the D’Entrecasteaux | Islands, ES Ba T ae aine ee ont ater sect Papua 120 middle Triassic megafossil flora from Dermanyssidae ea 186 ca naa northeastern New es Devonian, early, igneous activity in the out pe Tumut region 13 Riek, E. F., Four- winged Diptera from Domrow, R., New records and species of R the Upper as me o yee ee Laelaps and allied genera from Cpaieane »y SEE UES) Gx Australasia (Acari: Dermanyssidae) 186 Schicha, E., Immature Stages of three Domrow, R., Campylochirus Trouessart Hee ae eee ed was etc., see Fain, A. rom apple in Australia Eclytini, final-instar larvae of . 114 Scorpaenodes steenet, new species . 145 Fain, A., and Domrow, R., The genera Short, J. R. T., A description and classi- Campylochirus ‘Trouessart and Cam- fication of some final-instar larvae of pylochiropsis Fain (Acari: Atopo- the Phytodietini and Helytini (Hy- melidae), parasites of phalangeroid menoptera, Ichneumonidae, Try- marsupials in Australasia 27 phoninae) . 114 262 INDEX Page Siddiqi, M. Y., and Carolin, R. C., Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. II. The effects of water supply and phosphorus uptake on the growth of Banksia serratifolia, B. aspleniifolia and B. ericifolia Ne 38 Siddiqi, M. Y., Carolin, R. C., and Myers- cough, P. J., Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. Ill. Regrowth of vegetation after fire. 53 Spencer, M., Biodome: “andl poner ion patterns of the Anopheles punctulatus complex (Diptera: Culicidae) in the D’Entrecasteaux Islands, Papua .. 120 Stratigraphy of Tumut region, New South Wales .. 13 Sudzuki, M., and tanta, ap he, WA new species of Brachionus (Rotifera) from the Myall Lakes, New South Wales.. 162 Page Tabulate corals, Upper Ordovician, from central-western New South Wales .. 167 Thadeua, new name proposed for Austra- lolaelaps Womersley es .. 186 Thadeua serrata, new species .. .. 186 Timms, B. V., see Sudzuki, M Triassic megafossil flora, isotopic dating of Be a bi Be Stoilh LE Tumut, New South Wales, early Devoni- an igneous activity and stratigraphic correlations in the region .. 13 Upper Ordovician tabulate corals of central-western New South Wales .. 167 Watson, I. A., see Luig, N. H. ‘ Webby, B. D., Upper Ordovician tabulate corals from central-western New South Wales 167 Wheat stem rust epiphytotic i in southern and eastern Australia 65 Whitley, Gilbert Percy, 1903-1975, Memorial Series No. 23 Ae .. 256 Proceedings of the _ Linnean Society of New South Wales VOLUME 10I Nos. 445-448 a a ee CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, VOLUME PART 1 (No. 445) (Issued 9th September, 1976) CONTENTS Annual General Meeting : Report on the Affairs of the ee for the Year Balance Sheets BARKAS, J. P. Harly Devonian igneous activity and some stratigraphic correlations in the Tumut region, New South Wales .. s E Fain, A., and Domrow, R. The genera Campylochirus Trouessart and Campylochiropsis Fain (Acari: Atopomelidae), parasites of phalan- geroid marsupials in Australasia .. oe ap Bs xe a Sippi1q1, M. Y., and CARoLIN, R. C. Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. Il. The effects of water supply and phosphorus uptake on the growth of Banksia es B. EAS folia and B. ericifolia ue i ie Mt SIDDIQI, M. Y., CAROLIN, R. C., and MyERscouGH, P. J. Studies in the ecology of coastal heath in New South Wales. Ill. Regrowth of vegetation after fire ; : A on ys PART 2 (No. 446) (Issued 16th March, 1977) CONTENTS Luie, N. H., and Watson, I. A. The role of barley, rye and grasses in the 1973-74 wheat stem rust ae in southern and eastern Australia a ; ie es RETALLACK, G., GOULD, R. H., and RUNNEGAR, B. Isotopic dating of a middle Triassic megafossil flora from near Nymboida, northeastern New South Wales .. ae ih si : SHort, J. R. T. A description and classification of some final-instar larvae of the Phytodietini and Ey (Hymenoptera, Ichneu- monidae, Tryphoninae) so ae Ay oe SPENCER, M. Bionomics and behaviour patterns of the Anopheles punctulatus complex (Diptera: Culicidae) in the D’Entrecasteaux Islands, Papua. A Ass ; mn lO| Page 65 114 120 PART 3 (No. 447) (Issued 6th April, 1977) CONTENTS ALLEN, G. R. A new ee of eon fish Pe eee from Western Australia .. ScHicHA, E. Immature stages of three mite species eae eer from apple in Australia rai iN { ass 35 SuDzuKI, M., and Trvums, B. V. A new species of Brachionus (Rotifera) from the Myall Lakes, New South Wales Ae ey we WEBBY, B. D. Upper Ordovician tabulate corals from central-western New South Wales . at, ai ae uh ae a PART 4 (No. 448) (Issued 28th July, 1977) CONTENTS Domrow, R. New records and species of Laelaps and allied genera from Australasia (Acari: Dermanyssidae). Part 2 FLEMING, C. A. The biogeographic basis of national cultures. (Sir William Macleay Memorial Lecture 1976) xe ae us GREENWOOD, W. ‘The food plants or hosts of some Fijian insects. V. GREER, A. E. On the adaptive significance of the loss of an oviduct in reptiles aie a ae A ae Ae ais ae Riex, E. F. Four-winged Diptera from the Upper Permian of Australia Gilbert Percy Whitley, 1903-1975 (Memorial Series No. 23) Index Notes and instructions for authors Page 145 149 162 167 Page 185 218 237 242 250 256 261 267 The Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales contain original papers relative to “the Science of Natural History in all its branches ’”’, and reports of business transacted at the meetings of the Society. NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR AUTHORS Original papers may be submitted for consideration for publication in the Society’s Proceedings. Submission of a manuscript must imply that the contents are original and have not been published previously in the same, similar, or abbreviated form, and that no similar paper is being or will be submitted for publication elsewhere until it has been either (a) not accepted for publication by the Society or (b) withdrawn by the author. Papers submitted should embody the results of a significant piece of work. Interim reports, serialized studies and student theses should not be submitted. Papers are accepted for publication (or otherwise) by the Council of the Society after taking into consideration advice received from at least one referee. ‘The decision of Council is final. Once accepted for publication a paper becomes the property of the Society, and copyright is vested in the Society. Reproduction of the author’s synopsis in abstracting journals is authorized. A paper may be withdrawn by the author at any time prior to acceptance. Papers may be submitted by members or non-members of the Society but a paper submitted by a non-member must be communicated by a member of the Society, and will not ordinarily be considered for acceptance before July in each calendar year. SUBMISSION OF MANUSCRIPTS Manuscripts should be forwarded to the Secretary, The Linnean Society of New South Wales, _ Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000. Text and illustrations must be submitted in duplicate. The illustrations may be duplicated by any acceptable clear method and the duplicate set need not necessarily be identical in size with the originals. The author should retain a third copy for checking proofs. If a paper is not accepted for publication, the original copy of the typescript and illustrations will be returned to the author, but the duplicate copy may be retained by the Society. Owing to the ever growing costs of publication, authors are requested to write their papers clearly and concisely and exercise all reasonable economy in the number and form of illustrations and tables. Grants towards the cost of publication should be secured wherever possible from the author’s own institution or elsewhere ; contributions from authors, especially non-member authors, may be requested at Council’s discretion, particularly in the case of lengthy papers, or those with numerous illustrations or tables. Manuscripts must be submitted in final, fully corrected form. Authors may be liable for the cost of proof corrections (if allowed) if the number of alterations and corrections is considerable. Authors are urged to submit their paper to a colleague for constructive criticism prior to final typing and submission for publication. MANUSCRIPTS Papers should be typewritten, double spacing throughout, on one side of quarto or foolscap paper, with at least one-inch margins all round. The desired position of all text-figures, maps and tables may be indicated in the margin. All pages should be numbered serially and securely fastened together. Papers should conform to the following general layout as far as practicable or appropriate : (a) Title——The title should be concise but informative. The name(s) of the author(s) and the name of the institution where the work was carried out should follow the title. The name of a new taxon of plants or animals should not be included in the title. A short title appropriate for the running heading of subsequent pages may be suggested. The title, etc., should be on a separate page at the commencement of the typescript. (6) Synopsis.—A concise abstract (without abbreviations), preferably consisting of not more than about 200 words, should be supplied on a separate sheet and in triplicate. It should be complete in itself and indicate the scope of the work. It will be printed below the title of the paper ; it will be available for reprinting by abstracting journals. (c) Table of Contents.—This should give the complete hierarchy of headings and sub-headings used in the subject-matter of the paper. It should be supplied on a separate sheet for guidance of the editor and will not ordinarily be printed. (d) Introduction, followed by the Subject Matter of the paper. Papers may be divided into sections described by short headings. (e) Discussion, Conclusions or Summary (if necessary).—This should summarize the conclusions reached rather than be a précis of the paper as a whole (cf. Synopsis). NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR AUTHORS (f) Acknowledgements, if any. (g) References.—The author, who is alone responsible for their accuracy, should carefully check all references against the text, to ensure especially that : (i) The spelling of authors’ names is consistent, and the dates, volume numbers and page numbers are correct. (ii) All authors quoted in the text are included in the list of references. References should be cited in the text by the author’s name and date, e.g., Bullough (1939) or (Bullough, 1939) according to context, and listed alphabetically under References thus : Bullough, W. S., 1939.—A study of the reproductive cycle of the minnow in relation to the environment. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., Ser. A, 109 : 79-108. If more than one reference by the same author(s) published in the same year is cited, use a, b, etc., after the year in both text and list, e.g., Bullough (1939a). Titles of books must be given in full together with the place of publication, name of publisher” and indication of edition if other than the first. Latin names of plants and animals (genera, species and their subdivisions) should be underlined to indicate italics. An initial capital letter must be used for Latin names of orders, families and similar names, but these should not be underlined. Abbreviations.—Only standard abbreviations should be used; authors should reter to the British Standard 1991: Part 1, 1976. Recommendations for Letter symbols, signs and abbreviations. The abbreviations of names of periodicals should conform to the Internationa! Code for the Abbreviation of Titles of Periodicals (ISO Standard, ISO 4—1972). Footnotes should be avoided as far as possible. Codes of Nomenclature.—The Botanical and Zoological Codes of Nomenclature must be strictly followed. If a new taxon is described, the institution in which the type material is deposited must be indicated. Language.—Papers in languages other than English are unlikely to be accepted for publication. Foreign authors are urged to seek assistance, if necessary, in rendering the paper in fluent English prior to submission. Measurements must be expressed in the metric system as far as practicable, and exclusively in scientific description. ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES The maximum dimensions available for either text-figures or plates are 20 x 12-5 cm. Black and white drawings and diagrams for text-figures should be in Indian ink on smooth white card such as Bristol board, the lines cleanly drawn, and due attention paid tc the consequences of reduction. Graphs should similarly be in Indian ink on white card, or on faint blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Maps should be in Indian ink on white card or tracing linen; if the latter the linen should not be folded. Maps should be of a size and scale that can be conveniently reduced to the size of a single page. It is desirable that all black and white illustrations should be drawn 14-2 times the size that they will appear in print. Photographs for half-tone plates should be the size required for final reproduction or slightly . larger, printed on glossy paper, of good contrast and best quality. A number of small photographs can be arranged to form one plate. Illustrations for colour reproduction cannot be accepted unless the author meets the difference in cost between black and white and colour reproduction. Illustrations of all kinds should bear the author’s name and the number of each, lightly pencilled on the back, and their required orientation clearly indicated. Legends for illustrations should be typed on separate sheets at the end of the manuscript. Great care should be taken in stating magnifications of illustrations, making it clear whether numbers quoted refer to before or after reduction. Tables.—Tables should be numbered consecutively and referred to specifically in the text by number. Hach table, together with a heading descriptive of its contents, should be submitted on a separate sheet. Elaborate tables should be avoided. GENERAL Proofs.—A set of galley proofs will be forwarded to the author who should correct and return them promptly to the Secretary. Reprints.—Twenty-five reprints are supplied free to authors who are members of the Society. Additional reprints may be ordered at the authors’ expense, if desired. No free reprints are supplied to non-members, who may order the number required at their own expense. Orders for reprints should be placed with the Secretary immediately after the paper has been accepted for publication. Orders received after the paper has been printed may not be accepted. Joint Authorship.—In the case of papers by more than one author, one of them must accept responsibility for all correspondence with the Society regarding the paper. AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO. -LTD., 71-79 ARUNDEL ST., GLEBE, N.S.W. , 2037 ? 1977 Copies of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SouTH WALES (with the exception of a few volumes and Parts) may be purchased from the Society, Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000. Current charges for the PROCEEDINGS are : Volumes—$16.00 each for 1st Series (Volumes 1-10); $11.00 each for 2nd Series (Volumes 11-20) and all subsequent volumes. Parts— $5.00 each for all back Parts; $4.00 each for current Parts. For volumes of 5 or 6 Parts, $1.00 each for first and last Parts. Prices do not include postage. Subscription to the PROCEEDINGS—$20.00 per volume, plus $2.50 postage— $22.50. All prices are in Australian currency. These charges may be revised from time to time, and inquiries should be addressed to The Secretary, Linnean Society of New South Wales, Science Centre, 35-43 Clarence Street, Sydney, N.S.W., 2000, Australia. The Society’s PROCEEDINGS are printed and published for the Society by the Australasian Medical Publishing Co., Ltd., 71-79 Arundel Street, Glebe, N.S.W. 2037. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaLEs ISSN : 0047-4746. Coden : PLSW-A Proceedings, Volume 101, Part 4, 1977 CONTENTS Domrow, R. New records and species of Laelaps and allied genera from Australasia (Acari: Dermanyssidae). Part 2 .. ne : FLEMING, C. A. The biogeographic basis of national cultures. (Sir William Macleay Memorial Lecture 1976) ae ae Ge GREENWOOD, W. The food plants or hosts of some Fijian insects. V .. GREER, A. E. On the adaptive significance of the loss of an oviduct in reptiles an he Sins ies a st : Rizk, E. F. Four-winged Diptera from the Upper Permian of Australia Gilbert Percy Whitley, 1903-1975 (Memorial Series No. 23) Index Notes and instructions for authors Page 185 218 237 242 250 256 261 267 4 | 1 ‘ ag ee — ae ee ~ = Sag BL/WHOL LIBRARY aoe ree ‘s cama abinpiecen tee ee BASU“ 8 Sonim Sag, Seen een smdnpominerdrgg ee nk apaeicon ee ; PAS eye gn gene - 426 vam K smarSsuspas : aa ~ AONE a: ‘ : Terhune poy eg : bs z ones NPA Ne pers Pere ryeen ga “ Seed aesaswtio nee are Stine ye ge WTS EM £ ye Mi ce a ear rk aw, Pe yee in oe oe RRS Re, tect ©: Serpe SUF Pred wees ton Map he AB bay, ae Sree bi IO a8 entnbaes 5 APART TONE oy EAE We wb are LORDS Peary ip NENP Mr nse, PG AOrY ty ep etews, Shee LL Peay eeiae : SRE Re get g raps egret yop seinen ger ereaue: Ue Re, « epeaeies Wed etgrpeire cee 4 ee Abst bay,